Provided by: s-nail_14.9.24-1_amd64 
NAME
S-nail [v14.9.24] — send and receive Internet mail
SYNOPSIS
s-nail [-DdEFinv~#] [-: spec] [-A account] [:-a attachment:] [:-b bcc-addr:]
[:-C "field: body":] [:-c cc-addr:] [-M type | -m file | -q file | -t] [-r from-addr]
[:-S var[=value]:] [-s subject] [:-T "field: addr":] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [-.]
:to-addr: [-- :mta-option:]
s-nail [-DdEeHiNnRv~#] [-: spec] [-A account] [:-C "field: body":] [-L spec] [-r from-addr]
[:-S var[=value]:] [-u user] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [-- :mta-option:]
s-nail [-DdEeHiNnRv~#] [-: spec] [-A account] [:-C "field: body":] -f [-L spec]
[-r from-addr] [:-S var[=value]:] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [file] [-- :mta-option:]
s-nail -h | --help
s-nail -V | --version
DESCRIPTION
Note: S-nail (S-nail) will see major changes in v15.0 (circa 2022). Some backward
incompatibilities cannot be avoided. COMMANDS change to Shell-style argument quoting,
and shell metacharacters will become (more) meaningful. Some commands accept new
syntax today via wysh (Command modifiers). Behaviour is flagged [v15-compat] and [no
v15-compat], setting v15-compat (INTERNAL VARIABLES) will choose new behaviour when
applicable; giving it a value makes wysh an implied default. [Obsolete] flags what
will vanish.
Warning! v15-compat (with value) will be a default in v14.10.0!
S-nail provides a simple and friendly environment for sending and receiving mail. It is
intended to provide the functionality of the POSIX mailx(1) command, but is MIME capable and
optionally offers extensions for line editing, S/MIME, SMTP and POP3, among others. S-nail
divides incoming mail into its constituent messages and allows the user to deal with them in
any order. It offers many COMMANDS and INTERNAL VARIABLES for manipulating messages and
sending mail. It provides the user simple editing capabilities to ease the composition of
outgoing messages, and increasingly powerful and reliable non-interactive scripting
capabilities.
Options
-: spec, --resource-files=..
Controls loading of (as via source) Resource files: spec is parsed case-
insensitively, the letter ‘s’ corresponds to the system wide s-nail.rc, ‘u’ the
user's personal file ~/.mailrc. The (original) system wide resource is also
compiled-in, accessible via ‘x’. The letters ‘-’ and ‘/’ disable usage of
resource files. Order matters, default is ‘su’. This option overrides -n.
-A name, --account=..
Activate user account name after program startup is complete (resource files
loaded, only -X commands are to be executed), and switch to its primary system
mailbox (most likely the inbox). If activation fails the program exits if used
non-interactively, or if any of errexit or posix are set.
-a file[=input-charset[#output-charset]], --attach=..
(Send mode) Attach file. For (Compose mode) opportunities refer to ~@ and ~^.
file is subject to tilde expansion (see Filename transformations and folder); if
it is not accessible but contains a ‘=’ character, anything before the last ‘=’
will be used as the filename, anything thereafter as a character set
specification, as shown.
If only an input character set is specified, the input side is fixed, and no
character set conversion will be applied; an empty or the special string hyphen-
minus ‘-’ is taken for ttycharset (the default). If an output character set has
also been specified the desired conversion is performed immediately, not
considering file type and content, except for an empty string or hyphen-minus ‘-’,
which select the default conversion algorithm (see Character sets): no immediate
conversion is performed, file and its contents will be MIME-classified (HTML mail
and MIME attachments, The mime.types files) first — only the latter mode is
available unless features includes ‘,+iconv,’.
-B ([Obsolete]: S-nail will always use line-buffered output, to gain line-buffered
input even in batch mode enable batch mode via -#.)
-b addr, --bcc=..
(Send mode) Send a blind carbon copy to recipient addr. The option may be used
multiple times. Also see the section On sending mail, and non-interactive mode.
-C "field: body", --custom-header=..
Create a custom header which persists for an entire session. A custom header
consists of the field name followed by a colon ‘:’ and the field content body, for
example ‘-C "Blah: Neminem laede; imo omnes, quantum potes, juva"’. Standard
header field names cannot be overwritten by custom headers. Runtime adjustable
custom headers are available via the variable customhdr, and in (Compose mode) ~^,
one of the COMMAND ESCAPES, as well as digmsg are the most flexible and powerful
options to manage message headers. This option may be used multiple times.
-c addr, --cc=..
(Send mode) Just like -b, except it places the argument in the list of carbon
copies.
-D, --disconnected
[Option] Startup with disconnected set.
-d, --debug
Enter a debug-only sandbox mode by setting the internal variable debug; the same
can be achieved via ‘-S debug’ or ‘set debug’. Also see -v.
-E, --discard-empty-messages
(Send mode) set skipemptybody and thus discard messages with an empty message part
body, successfully.
-e, --check-and-exit
Just check if mail is present (in the system inbox or the one specified via -f):
if yes, return an exit status of zero, a non-zero value otherwise. To restrict
the set of mails to consider in this evaluation a message specification can be
added with the option -L. Quickrun: does not open an interactive session.
-F (Send mode) Save the message to send in a file named after the local part of the
first recipient's address (instead of in record).
-f, --file
Read in the contents of the user's secondary mailbox MBOX (or the specified file)
for processing; when S-nail is quit, it writes undeleted messages back to this
file (but be aware of the hold option). The optional file argument will undergo
some special Filename transformations (as via folder). Note that file is not an
argument to the flag -f, but is instead taken from the command line after option
processing has been completed. In order to use a file that starts with a hyphen-
minus, prefix with a relative path, as in ‘./-hyphenbox.mbox’.
-H, --header-summary
Display a summary of headers for the given folder (depending on -u, inbox or MAIL,
or as specified via -f), then exit. A configurable summary view is available via
the option -L. This mode does not honour showlast. Quickrun: does not open an
interactive session.
-h, --help
Show a brief usage summary; use --long-help for a list long options.
-i set ignore to ignore tty interrupt signals.
-L spec, --search=..
Display a summary of headers of all messages that match the given spec in the
folder found by the same algorithm used by -H, then exit. See the section
Specifying messages for the format of spec. This mode does not honour showlast.
If the -e option has been given in addition no header summary is produced, but
S-nail will instead indicate via its exit status whether spec matched any messages
(‘0’) or not (‘1’); note that any verbose output is suppressed in this mode and
must instead be enabled explicitly (see -v). Quickrun: does not open an
interactive session.
-M type (Send mode) Will flag standard input with the MIME ‘Content-Type:’ set to the
given known type (HTML mail and MIME attachments, The mime.types files) and use it
as the main message body. [v15 behaviour may differ] Using this option will
bypass processing of message-inject-head and message-inject-tail. Also see -q,
-m, -t.
-m file (Send mode) MIME classify the specified file and use it as the main message body.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Using this option will bypass processing of
message-inject-head and message-inject-tail. Also see -q, -M, -t.
-N, --no-header-summary
inhibit the initial display of message headers when reading mail or editing a
mailbox folder by calling unset for the internal variable header.
-n Standard flag that inhibits reading the system wide s-nail.rc upon startup. The
option -: allows more control over the startup sequence; also see Resource files.
-q file, --quote-file=..
(Send mode) Initialize the message body with the contents of file, which may be
standard input ‘-’ only in non-interactive context. Also see -M, -m, -t.
-R, --read-only
Any mailbox folder aka folder opened will be in read-only mode.
-r from-addr, --from-address=..
The RFC 5321 reverse-path used for relaying and delegating messages to its
destination(s), for example to report delivery errors, is normally derived from
the address which appears in the from header (or, if that contains multiple
addresses, in sender). A file-based aka local executable mta (Mail-Transfer-
Agent), however, instead uses the local identity of the initiating user.
When this command line option is used the given single addressee from-addr will be
assigned to the internal variable from, but in addition the command line option -f
from-addr will be passed to a file-based mta whenever a message is sent. Shall
from-addr include a user name the address components will be separated and the
name part will be passed to a file-based mta individually via -F name. Even
though not a recipient the ‘shquote’ expandaddr flag is supported.
If an empty string is passed as from-addr then the content of the variable from
(or, if that contains multiple addresses, sender) will be evaluated and used for
this purpose whenever the file-based mta is contacted. By default, without -r
that is, neither -f nor -F command line options are used when contacting a file-
based MTA, unless this automatic deduction is enforced by setting the internal
variable r-option-implicit.
Remarks: many default installations and sites disallow overriding the local user
identity like this unless either the MTA has been configured accordingly or the
user is member of a group with special privileges. Passing an invalid address
will cause an error.
-S var[=value], --set=..
set (or, with a prefix string ‘no’, as documented in INTERNAL VARIABLES, unset)
variable and optionally assign value, if supported; [v15 behaviour may differ] the
entire expression is evaluated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see
Shell-style argument quoting) if the internal variable v15-compat is set. If the
operation fails the program will exit if any of errexit or posix are set.
Settings established via -S cannot be changed from within Resource files or an
account switch initiated by -A. They will become mutable again before commands
registered via -X are executed.
-s subject, --subject=..
(Send mode) Specify the subject of the message to be sent. Newline (NL) and
carriage-return (CR) bytes are invalid and will be normalized to space (SP)
characters.
-T "field: addr", --target=..
(Send mode) Add addr to the list of receivers targeted by field, for now supported
are only ‘bcc’, ‘cc’, ‘fcc’, and ‘to’. Field and body (address) are separated by
a colon ‘:’ and optionally blank (space, tabulator) characters. The ‘shquote’
expandaddr flag is supported. addr is parsed like a message header address line,
as if it would be part of a template message fed in via -t, and the same modifier
suffix is supported. This option may be used multiple times.
-t, --template
(Send mode) The text message given (on standard input) is expected to contain,
separated from the message body by an empty line, one or multiple plain text
message headers. [v15 behaviour may differ] Readily prepared MIME mail messages
cannot be passed. Headers can span multiple consecutive lines if follow lines
start with any amount of whitespace. A line starting with the number sign ‘#’ in
the first column is ignored. Message recipients can be given via the message
headers ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’, ‘Bcc:’ (the ‘?single’ modifier enforces treatment as a
single addressee, for example ‘To?single: exa, <m@ple>’) or ‘Fcc:’, they will be
added to any recipients specified on the command line, and are likewise subject to
expandaddr validity checks. If a message subject is specified via ‘Subject:’ then
it will be used in favour of one given on the command line.
More optional headers are ‘Reply-To:’ (possibly overriding reply-to), ‘Sender:’
(sender), ‘From:’ (from and / or option -r). ‘Message-ID:’, ‘In-Reply-To:’,
‘References:’ and ‘Mail-Followup-To:’, by default created automatically dependent
on message context, will be used if specified (a special address massage will
however still occur for the latter). Any other custom header field (also see -C,
customhdr and ~^) is passed through entirely unchanged, and in conjunction with
the options -~ or -# it is possible to embed COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see -M, -m,
-q.
-u user, --inbox-of=..
Initially read the primary system mailbox of user, appropriate privileges
presumed; effectively identical to ‘-f %user’.
-V, --version
Show S-nails version and exit. The command version will also show the list of
features: ‘$ s-nail -:/ -Xversion -Xx’.
-v, --verbose
sets the internal variable verbose to enable logging of informational context
messages. (Increases level of verbosity when used multiple times.) Also see -d.
-X cmd, --startup-cmd=..
Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument) cmd to a list of commands to
be executed before normal operation starts. The commands will be evaluated as a
unit, just as via source. Correlates with -# and errexit.
-Y cmd, --cmd=..
Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument) cmd to a list of commands to
be executed after normal operation has started. The commands will be evaluated
successively in the given order, and as if given on the program's standard input —
before interactive prompting begins in interactive mode, after standard input has
been consumed otherwise.
-~, --enable-cmd-escapes
Enable COMMAND ESCAPES in (Compose mode) even in non-interactive use cases. This
can for example be used to automatically format the composed message text before
sending the message:
$ ( echo 'line one. Word. Word2.';\
echo '~| /usr/bin/fmt -tuw66' ) |\
LC_ALL=C s-nail -d~:/ -Sttycharset=utf-8 bob@exam.ple
-#, --batch-mode
Enables batch mode: standard input is made line buffered, the complete set of
(interactive) commands is available, processing of COMMAND ESCAPES is enabled in
Compose mode, and diverse INTERNAL VARIABLES are adjusted for batch necessities,
exactly as if done via -S: emptystart, noerrexit, noheader, noposix, quiet,
sendwait, typescript-mode as well as MAIL, MBOX and inbox (the latter three to
/dev/null). Also, the values of COLUMNS and LINES are looked up, and acted upon.
The following prepares an email message in a batched dry run:
$ for name in bob alice@exam.ple lisa@exam.ple; do
printf 'mail %s\n~s ubject\nText\n~.\n' "${name}"
done |
LC_ALL=C s-nail -#:x -Smta=test \
-X'alias bob bob@exam.ple'
-., --end-options
This flag forces termination of option processing in order to prevent “option
injection” (attacks). It also forcefully puts S-nail into send mode, see On
sending mail, and non-interactive mode.
If the setting of expandargv allows their recognition all mta-option arguments given at the
end of the command line after a ‘--’ separator will be passed through to a file-based mta
(Mail-Transfer-Agent) and persist for the entire session. expandargv constraints do not
apply to the content of mta-arguments. Command line receiver address handling supports the
‘shquote’ constraint of expandaddr, for more please see On sending mail, and non-interactive
mode.
$ s-nail -#:/ -X 'addrcodec enc Hey, ho <silver@go>' -Xx
A starter
S-nail is a direct descendant of BSD Mail, itself a successor to the Research UNIX mail
which “was there from the start” according to HISTORY. It thus represents the user side of
the UNIX mail system, whereas the system side (Mail-Transfer-Agent, MTA) was traditionally
taken by sendmail(8) (and most MTAs provide a binary of this name for compatibility
reasons). If the [Option]al SMTP mta is included in the features of S-nail then the system
side is not a mandatory precondition for mail delivery.
S-nail strives for compliance with the POSIX mailx(1) standard, but posix, one of the
INTERNAL VARIABLES, or its ENVIRONMENTal equivalent POSIXLY_CORRECT, needs to be set to
adjust behaviour to be almost on par. Almost, because there is one important difference:
POSIX Shell-style argument quoting is ([v15 behaviour may differ] increasingly) used instead
of the Old-style argument quoting that the standard documents, which is believed to be a
feature. The builtin as well as the (default) global s-nail.rc Resource files already bend
the standard imposed settings a bit.
For example, hold and keepsave are set in order to suppress the automatic moving of messages
to the secondary mailbox MBOX that would otherwise occur (see Message states), and keep to
not remove empty system MBOX mailbox files (or all empty such files in posix mode) to avoid
mangling of file permissions when files eventually get recreated.
To enter interactive mode even if the initial mailbox is empty emptystart is set,
editheaders to allow editing of headers as well as fullnames to not strip down addresses in
Compose mode, and quote to include the message that is being responded to when replying,
which is indented by an indentprefix that also deviates from standard imposed settings.
mime-counter-evidence is fully enabled, too. It sets followup-to-honour and reply-to-honour
to comply with reply address desires.
Credentials and other settings are easily addressable by grouping them via account. The
file mode creation mask can be managed with umask. Files and shell pipe output can be
sourced for evaluation, also during startup from within the Resource files. Informational
context can be available by setting verbose or debug (as via -v, -d).
On sending mail, and non-interactive mode
To send a message to one or more people, using a local or built-in mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent)
transport to actually deliver the generated mail message, S-nail can be invoked with
arguments which are the names of people to whom the mail will be sent, and the command line
options -b and -c can be used to add (blind) carbon copy receivers:
# Via test MTA
$ echo Hello, world | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s test $LOGNAME
# Via sendmail(1) MTA
$ </dev/null s-nail -:x -s test $LOGNAME
# Debug dry-run mode:
$ </dev/null LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ \
-Sttycharset=utf8 -Sfullnames \
-b bcc@exam.ple -c cc@exam.ple -. \
'(Lovely) Bob <bob@exam.ple>' eric@exam.ple
# With SMTP (no real sending due to -d debug dry-run)
$ LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
-S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=none \
-S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
-a /etc/mail.rc --end-options \
eric@exam.ple < /tmp/letter.txt
Email addresses and plain user names are subject to alternates filtering, names only are
first expanded through alias and mta-aliases. An address in angle brackets consisting only
of a valid local user ‘<name>’ will be converted to a fully qualified address if either
hostname is not set, or set to a non-empty value; if set to the empty value the conversion
is left up to the mta. By setting expandaddr fine-grained control of recipient address
types other than user names and network addresses is possible. Recipients are classified as
follows: any name that starts with a vertical bar ‘|’ character specifies a command pipe –
the command string following the ‘|’ is executed and the message is sent to its standard
input; likewise, any name that consists only of hyphen-minus ‘-’ or starts with the
character solidus ‘/’ or the character sequence dot solidus ‘./’ is treated as a file,
regardless of the remaining content. Any other name which contains a commercial at ‘@’
character is a network address; Any other name which starts with a plus sign ‘+’ character
is a mailbox name; Any other name which contains a solidus ‘/’ character but no exclamation
mark ‘!’ or percent sign ‘%’ character before is also a mailbox name; What remains is
treated as a network address. This classification can be avoided by using a ‘Fcc:’ header,
see Compose mode.
$ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test ./mbox.mbox
$ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test '|cat >> ./mbox.mbox'
$ echo safe | LC_ALL=C \
s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
--set mime-force-sendout --set fullnames \
-S expandaddr=fail,-all,+addr,failinvaddr -s test \
--end-options 'Imagine John <cold@turk.ey>'
Before messages are sent they undergo editing in Compose mode. But many settings are static
and can be set more generally. The envelope sender address for example is defined by from,
explicitly defining an originating hostname may be desirable, especially with the built-in
SMTP Mail-Transfer-Agent mta. Character sets for outgoing message and MIME part content are
configurable via sendcharsets, whereas input data is assumed to be in ttycharset. Message
data will be passed over the wire in a mime-encoding, and MIME parts aka attachments need a
mimetype, usually taken out of The mime.types files. Saving copies of sent messages in a
record mailbox may be desirable – as for most mailbox folder targets Filename
transformations will be performed.
For the purpose of arranging a complete environment of settings that can be switched to with
a single command or command line option there are accounts. Alternatively a flat
configuration could be possible, making use of so-called variable chains which automatically
pick ‘USER@HOST’ or ‘HOST’ context-dependent variants some variables support: for example
addressing ‘Folder pop3://yaa@exam.ple’ would find pop3-no-apop-yaa@exam.ple,
pop3-no-apop-exam.ple and pop3-no-apop in order. For more please see On URL syntax and
credential lookup and INTERNAL VARIABLES.
To avoid environmental noise scripts should create a script-local environment, ideally with
the command line options -: to disable configuration files in conjunction with repetitions
of -S to specify variables:
$ env LC_ALL=C s-nail -:/ \
-Sv15-compat \
-Sttycharset=utf-8 -Smime-force-sendout \
-Sexpandaddr=fail,-all,failinvaddr \
-S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=login \
-S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
-s 'Subject to go' -a attachment_file \
-Sfullnames -. \
'Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>' rec2@exam.ple \
< content_file
As shown, scripts producing messages can “fake” a locale environment, the above specifies
the all-compatible 7-bit clean LC_ALL “C”, but will nonetheless take and send UTF-8 in the
message text by using ttycharset. If character set conversion is compiled in (features
includes the term ‘,+iconv,’) invalid (according to ttycharset) character input data would
normally cause errors; setting mime-force-sendout will instead, as a last resort, classify
the input as binary data, and therefore allow message creation to be successful. (Such
content can then be inspected either by installing a pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE handler for
‘application/octet-stream’, or possibly automatically through mime-counter-evidence).
In interactive mode, introduced soon, messages can be sent by calling the mail command with
a list of recipient addresses:
$ s-nail -:/ -Squiet -Semptystart -Sfullnames -Smta=test
"/var/spool/mail/user": 0 messages
? mail "Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>", rec2@exam.ple
...
? # Will do the right thing (tm)
? m rec1@exam.ple rec2@exam.ple
Compose mode
If standard input is a terminal rather than the message to be sent, the user is expected to
type in the message contents. In compose mode lines beginning with the character ‘~’ (in
fact the value of escape) are special – these are so-called COMMAND ESCAPES which can be
used to read in files, process shell commands, add and edit attachments and more. For
example ~v or ~e will start the VISUAL text EDITOR, respectively, to revise the message in
its current state, ~h allows editing of the most important message headers, with the potent
~^ custom headers can be created, for example (more specifically than with -C and
customhdr). [Option]ally ~? gives an overview of most other available command escapes.
To create file-carbon-copies the special recipient header ‘Fcc:’ may be used as often as
desired, for example via ~^. Its entire value (or body in standard terms) is interpreted as
a folder target, after having been subject to Filename transformations: this is the only way
to create a file-carbon-copy without introducing an ambiguity regarding the interpretation
of the address, file names with leading vertical bars or commercial ats can be used. Like
all other recipients ‘Fcc:’ is subject to the checks of expandaddr. Any local file and pipe
command addressee honours the setting of mbox-fcc-and-pcc.
Once finished with editing the command escape ~. (see there) will call hooks, insert
automatic injections and receivers, leave compose mode and send the message once it is
completed. Aborting letter composition is possible with either of ~x or ~q, the latter of
which will save the message in the file denoted by DEAD unless nosave is set. And unless
ignoreeof is set the effect of ~. can also be achieved by typing end-of-transmission (EOT)
via ‘control-D’ (‘^D’) at the beginning of an empty line, and ~q is always reachable by
typing end-of-text (ETX) twice via ‘control-C’ (‘^C’).
The compose mode hooks on-compose-enter, on-compose-splice, on-compose-leave and
on-compose-cleanup may be set to defined macros and provide reliable and increasingly
powerful mechanisms to perform automated message adjustments dependent on message context,
for example addition of message signatures (message-inject-head, message-inject-tail) or
creation of additional receiver lists (also by setting autocc, autobcc). To achieve that
the command digmsg may be used in order to query and adjust status of message(s). The
splice hook can also make use of COMMAND ESCAPES. ([v15 behaviour may differ] The compose
mode hooks work for forward, mail, reply and variants; resend and Resend only provide the
hooks on-resend-enter and on-resend-cleanup, which are pretty restricted due to the nature
of the operation.)
On reading mail, and more on interactive mode
When invoked without addressees S-nail enters interactive mode in which mails may be read.
When used like that the user's system inbox (for more on mailbox types please see the
command folder) is read in and a one line header of each message therein is displayed if the
variable header is set. The visual style of this summary of headers can be adjusted through
the variable headline and the possible sorting criterion via autosort. Scrolling through
screenfuls of headers can be performed with the command z. If the initially opened mailbox
is empty S-nail will instead exit immediately (after displaying a message) unless the
variable emptystart is set.
At the prompt the command list will give a listing of all available commands and help will
[Option]ally give a summary of some common ones. If the [Option]al documentation strings
are available (see features) one can type ‘help X’ (or ‘?X’) and see the actual expansion of
‘X’ and what its purpose is, i.e., commands can be abbreviated (note that POSIX defines some
abbreviations, so that the alphabetical order of commands does not necessarily relate to the
abbreviations; it is however possible to define overwrites with commandalias). These
commands can also produce a more verbose output.
Messages are given numbers (starting at 1) which uniquely identify messages; the current
message – the “dot” – will either be the first new message, or the first unread message, or
the first message of the mailbox; the internal variable showlast will instead cause usage of
the last message for this purpose. The command headers will display a screenful of header
summaries containing the “dot”, whereas from will display only the summaries of the given
messages, defaulting to the “dot”.
Message content can be displayed with the command type (‘t’, alias print). Here the
variable crt controls whether and when S-nail will use the configured PAGER for display
instead of directly writing to the user terminal screen, the sole difference to the command
more, which will always use the PAGER. The command top will instead only show the first
toplines of a message (maybe even compressed if topsqueeze is set). Message display
experience may improve by setting and adjusting mime-counter-evidence, and also see HTML
mail and MIME attachments.
By default the current message (“dot”) is displayed, but like with many other commands it is
possible to give a fancy message specification (see Specifying messages), for example ‘t:u’
will display all unread messages, ‘t.’ will display the “dot”, ‘t 1 5’ will type the
messages 1 and 5, ‘t 1-5’ will type the messages 1 through 5, and ‘t-’ and ‘t+’ will display
the previous and the next message, respectively. The command search (a more substantial
alias for from) will display a header summary of the given message specification list
instead of their content; the following will search for subjects:
? from '@Some subject to search for'
In the default setup all header fields of a message will be typed, but fields can be white-
or blacklisted for a variety of applications by using the command headerpick, e.g., to
restrict their display to a very restricted set for type: ‘headerpick type retain from to cc
subject’. In order to display all header fields of a message regardless of currently active
ignore or retain lists, use the commands Type and Top; Show will show the raw message
content. Note that historically the global s-nail.rc not only adjusts the list of displayed
headers, but also sets crt. ([v15 behaviour may differ] A yet somewhat restricted) Reliable
scriptable message inspection is available via digmsg.
Dependent upon the configuration a line editor (see the section On terminal control and line
editor) aims at making the user experience with the many COMMANDS a bit nicer. When reading
the system inbox, or when -f (or folder) specified a mailbox explicitly prefixed with the
special ‘%:’ modifier (to propagate it to a primary system mailbox), then messages which
have been read (see Message states) will be automatically moved to a secondary mailbox, the
user's MBOX file, when the mailbox is left, either by changing the active mailbox or by
quitting S-nail – this automatic moving from a system- or primary- to the secondary mailbox
is not performed when the variable hold is set. Messages can also be explicitly moved to
other mailboxes, whereas copy keeps the original message. write can be used to write out
data content of specific parts of messages.
After examining a message the user can reply ‘r’ to the sender and all recipients (which
will also be placed in ‘To:’ unless recipients-in-cc is set), or Reply ‘R’ exclusively to
the sender(s). To comply with with the receivers desired reply address the quadoptions
followup-to-honour and reply-to-honour should usually be set. The commands Lreply and
Lfollowup know how to apply a special addressee massage, see Mailing lists. Dependent on
the presence and value of quote the message being replied to will be included in a quoted
form. forwarding a message will allow editing the new message: the original message will be
contained in the message body, adjusted according to headerpick. It is possible to resend
or Resend messages: the former will add a series of ‘Resent-’ headers, whereas the latter
will not; different to newly created messages editing is not possible and no copy will be
saved even with record unless the additional variable record-resent is set. When sending,
replying or forwarding messages comments and full names will be stripped from recipient
addresses unless the internal variable fullnames is set.
Of course messages can be delete ‘d’, and they can spring into existence again via undelete,
or when the S-nail session is ended via the exit or xit commands to perform a quick program
termation. To end a mail processing session regularly and perform a full program exit one
may issue the command quit. It will, among others, move read messages to the secondary
mailbox MBOX as necessary, discard deleted messages in the current mailbox, and update the
[Option]al (see features) line editor history-file. By the way, whenever the main event
loop is about to look out for the next input line it will trigger the hook
on-main-loop-tick.
HTML mail and MIME attachments
HTML-only messages become more and more common, and many messages come bundled with a
bouquet of MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) parts and attachments. To get a
notion of MIME types there is a built-in default set, onto which the content of The
mime.types files will be added (as configured and allowed by mimetypes-load-control). Types
can also become registered and listed with the command mimetype. To improve interaction
with the faulty MIME part declarations of real life mime-counter-evidence will allow
verification of the given assertion, and the possible provision of an alternative, better
MIME type. Note plain text parts will always be preferred in ‘multipart/alternative’ MIME
messages unless mime-alternative-favour-rich is set.
Whereas a simple HTML-to-text filter for displaying HTML messages is [Option]ally supported
(indicated by ‘,+filter-html-tagsoup,’ in features), MIME types other than plain text cannot
be handled directly. To deal with specific non-text MIME types or file extensions programs
need to be registered which either prepare (re-)integrable plain text versions of their
input (a mode which is called copiousoutput), or display the content externally, for example
in a graphical window: the latter type is only considered by and for the command mimeview.
To install a handler program for a MIME type an according pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE variable needs
to be set; to define a handler for a file extension pipe-EXTENSION can be used – these
handlers take precedence. [Option]ally mail user agent configuration is supported (see The
Mailcap files), and will be queried for display or quote handlers after the former ones.
Type-markers registered via mimetype are the last possible source for information how to
handle a MIME type.
For example, to display HTML messages integrated via the text browsers lynx(1) or elinks(1),
register a MathML MIME type and enable its plain text display, and to open PDF attachments
in an external PDF viewer, asynchronously and with some other magic attached:
? if "$features" !% ,+filter-html-tagsoup,
? #set pipe-text/html='?* elinks -force-html -dump 1'
? set pipe-text/html='?* lynx -stdin -dump -force_html'
? # Display HTML as plain text instead
? #set pipe-text/html=?t
? endif
? mimetype ?t application/mathml+xml mathml
? wysh set pipe-application/pdf='?&=? \
trap "rm -f \"${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}\"" EXIT;\
trap "trap \"\" INT QUIT TERM; exit 1" INT QUIT TERM;\
mupdf "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}"'
? define showhtml {
? \localopts yes
? \set mime-alternative-favour-rich pipe-text/html=?h?
? \type "$@"
? }
? \commandalias html \\call showhtml
Mailing lists
Known or subscribed-to mailing lists may be flagged in the summary of headers (headline
format character ‘%L’), and will gain special treatment when sending mails: the variable
followup-to-honour will ensure that a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is honoured when a message
is being replied to (reply, followup, Lreply, Lfollowup), and followup-to controls creation
of this header when creating mails, if the necessary user setup (from, sender); is
available; then, it may also be created automatically, for example when list-replying via
Lreply or Lfollowup, when followup or reply is used and the messages ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ is
honoured etc.
The commands mlist and mlsubscribe manage S-nails notion of which addresses are mailing
lists. With the [Option]al regular expression support any address which contains any of the
magic regular expression characters (‘^[*+?|$’; see re_format(7) or regex(7), dependent on
the host system) will be compiled and used as one, possibly matching many addresses. It is
not possible to escape the “magic”: in order to match special characters as-is, bracket
expressions must be used, for example ‘search @subject@'[[]open bracket'’.
? set followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes \
reply-to-honour=ask-yes
? mlist a1@b1.c1 a2@b2.c2 '.*@lists\.c3$'
? mlsubscribe a4@b4.c4 exact@lists.c3
Known and subscribed lists differ in that for the latter the users address is not part of a
generated ‘Mail-Followup-To:’. There are exceptions, for example if multiple lists are
addressed and not all have the subscription attribute. When replying to a message its list
address (‘List-Post:’ header) is automatically and temporarily treated like a known mlist;
dependent on the variable reply-to-honour an existing ‘Reply-To:’ is used instead (if it is
a single address on the same domain as ‘List-Post:’) in order to accept a list
administrator's wish that is supposed to have been manifested like that.
For convenience and compatibility with mail programs that do not honour the non-standard M-
F-T, an automatic user entry in the carbon-copy ‘Cc:’ address list of generated message can
be created by setting followup-to-add-cc. This entry will be added whenever the user will
be placed in the ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ list, and is not a regular addressee already.
reply-to-swap-in tries to deal with the address rewriting that many mailing-lists nowadays
perform to work around DKIM / DMARC etc. standard imposed problems.
Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME
[Option] S/MIME provides two central mechanisms: message signing and message encryption. A
signed message contains some data in addition to the regular text. The data can be used to
verify that the message has been sent using a valid certificate, that the sender address
matches that in the certificate, and that the message text has not been altered. Signing a
message does not change its regular text; it can be read regardless of whether the
recipients software is able to handle S/MIME. It is thus usually possible to sign all
outgoing messages if so desired.
Encryption, in contrast, makes the message text invisible for all people except those who
have access to the secret decryption key. To encrypt a message, the specific recipients
public encryption key must be known. It is therefore not possible to send encrypted mail to
people unless their key has been retrieved from either previous communication or public key
directories. Because signing is performed with private keys, and encryption with public
keys, messages should always be signed before being encrypted.
A central concept to S/MIME is that of the certification authority (CA). A CA is a trusted
institution that issues certificates. For each of these certificates it can be verified
that it really originates from the CA, provided that the CA's own certificate is previously
known. A set of CA certificates is usually delivered and installed together with the
cryptographical library that is used on the local system. Therefore reasonable security for
S/MIME on the Internet is provided if the source that provides that library installation is
trusted. It is also possible to use a specific pool of trusted certificates. If this is
desired, smime-ca-no-defaults should be set to avoid using the default certificate pool, and
smime-ca-file and/or smime-ca-dir should be pointed to a trusted pool of certificates. A
certificate cannot be more secure than the method its CA certificate has been retrieved
with.
This trusted pool of certificates is used by the command verify to ensure that the given
S/MIME messages can be trusted. If so, verified sender certificates that were embedded in
signed messages can be saved locally with the command certsave, and used by S-nail to
encrypt further communication with these senders:
? certsave FILENAME
? set smime-encrypt-USER@HOST=FILENAME \
smime-cipher-USER@HOST=AES256
To sign outgoing messages, in order to allow receivers to verify the origin of these
messages, a personal S/MIME certificate is required. S-nail supports password-protected
personal certificates (and keys), see smime-sign-cert. The section On URL syntax and
credential lookup gives an overview of the possible sources of user credentials, and S/MIME
step by step shows examplarily how a private S/MIME certificate can be obtained. In
general, if such a private key plus certificate “pair” is available, all that needs to be
done is to set some variables:
? set smime-sign-cert=ME@exam.ple.paired \
smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
smime-sign from=myname@my.host
Variables of interest for S/MIME in general are smime-ca-dir, smime-ca-file, smime-ca-flags,
smime-ca-no-defaults, smime-crl-dir, smime-crl-file. For S/MIME signing of interest are
smime-sign, smime-sign-cert, smime-sign-include-certs and smime-sign-digest. Additional
variables of interest for S/MIME en- and decryption: smime-cipher and
smime-encrypt-USER@HOST. Variables of secondary interest may be
content-description-smime-message and content-description-smime-signature. S/MIME is
available if ‘,+smime,’ is included in features.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Note that neither S/MIME signing nor encryption applies to
message subjects or other header fields yet. Thus they may not contain sensitive
information for encrypted messages, and cannot be trusted even if the message content has
been verified. When sending signed messages, it is recommended to repeat any important
header information in the message text.
On URL syntax and credential lookup
For accessing protocol-specific resources Uniform Resource Locators (URL, RFC 3986) have
become omnipresent. Here they are expected in a “normalized” variant, not used in data
exchange, but only meant as a compact, easy-to-use way of defining and representing
information in a well-known notation; as such they do not conform to any real standard.
Optional parts are placed in brackets ‘[]’, optional either because there also exist other
ways to define the information, or because the part is protocol specific. ‘/path’ for
example is used by the [Option]al Maildir folder type and the IMAP protocol, but not by
POP3. If ‘USER’ and ‘PASSWORD’ are included in an URL server specification, URL percent
encoded (RFC 3986) forms are needed, generable with urlcodec.
PROTOCOL://[USER[:PASSWORD]@]server[:port][/path]
Often INTERNAL VARIABLES exist in multiple versions, called “variable chains” in this
document: the plain ‘variable’ as well as ‘variable-HOST’ and ‘variable-USER@HOST’. If a
port was specified ‘HOST’ really means ‘server:port’, not ‘server’. And this ‘USER’ is
never in URL percent encoded form. For example, whether the hypothetical ‘smtp://wings%3Aof
@a.dove’ including user and password was used, or whether it was ‘smtp://a.dove’ and it came
from a different source, to lookup the chain tls-config-pairs first ‘tls-config-pairs-
wings:of@a.dove’ is looked up, then ‘tls-config-pairs-a.dove’, before finally looking up the
plain variable.
The logic to collect (an accounts) credential information is as follows:
• A user is always required. If no ‘USER’ has been given in the URL the variables
user-HOST and user are looked up. Afterwards, when enforced by the [Option]al variables
netrc-lookup-HOST or netrc-lookup, The .netrc file of the user will be searched for a
‘HOST’ specific entry which provides a ‘login’ name: only unambiguous entries are used
(one possible matching entry for ‘HOST’).
If there is still no ‘USER’ then the verified LOGNAME, known to be a valid user on the
current host, is used.
• Authentication: unless otherwise noted the chain PROTOCOL-auth-USER@HOST,
PROTOCOL-auth-HOST, PROTOCOL-auth is checked, falling back to a protocol-specific
default as necessary.
• If no ‘PASSWORD’ has been given in the URL, then if the ‘USER’ has been found through
the [Option]al netrc-lookup, that may have also provided the password. Otherwise the
chain password-USER@HOST, password-HOST, password is looked up.
Thereafter the (now complete) [Option]al chain netrc-lookup-USER@HOST,
netrc-lookup-HOST, netrc-lookup is checked, if set the netrc cache is searched for a
password only (multiple user accounts for a single machine may exist as well as a
fallback entry without user but with a password).
If at that point there is still no password available, but the (protocols') chosen
authentication type requires a password, then in interactive mode the user will be
prompted on the terminal.
Note: S/MIME verification works relative to the values found in the ‘From:’ (or ‘Sender:’)
header field(s), which means the values of smime-sign, smime-sign-cert,
smime-sign-include-certs and smime-sign-digest will not be looked up using the ‘USER’ and
‘HOST’ chains from above, but instead use the corresponding values from the message that is
being worked on. If no address matches we assume and use the setting of from. In unusual
cases multiple and different ‘USER’ and ‘HOST’ combinations may therefore be involved – on
the other hand those unusual cases become possible. The usual case is as short as:
set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@HOST smtp-use-starttls \
smime-sign smime-sign-cert=+smime.pair \
from=myname@my.host
The section EXAMPLES contains complete example configurations.
Encrypted network communication
[Option] SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) aka its successor TLS (Transport Layer Security) are
protocols which aid in securing communication by providing a safely initiated and encrypted
network connection. A central concept of TLS are certificates: as part of each network
connection setup a (set of) certificates will be exchanged through which the identity of the
network peer can be cryptographically verified; if possible the TLS/SNI
(ServerNameIndication) extension will be enabled to allow servers fine-grained control over
the certificates being used. A locally installed pool of trusted certificates will then be
inspected, and verification will succeed if it contains a(n in)direct signer of the
presented certificate(s).
The local pool of trusted so-called CA (Certification Authority) certificates is usually
delivered with and used along the TLS library. A custom pool of trusted certificates can be
selected by pointing tls-ca-file and/or (with special preparation) tls-ca-dir to the desired
location; setting tls-ca-no-defaults in addition will avoid additional inspection of the
default pool. A certificate cannot be more secure than the method its CA certificate has
been retrieved with. For inspection or other purposes, the certificate of a server (as seen
when connecting to it) can be fetched with the command tls (port can usually be the protocol
name, too, and tls-verify is taken into account here):
$ s-nail -vX 'tls certchain SERVER-URL[:PORT]; x'
A local pool of CA certificates is not strictly necessary, however, server certificates can
also be verified via their fingerprint. For this a message digest will be calculated and
compared against the variable chain tls-fingerprint, and verification will succeed if the
fingerprint matches. The message digest (algorithm) can be configured via the variable
chain tls-fingerprint-digest; tls can again be used:
$ s-nail -X 'wysh set verbose; tls fingerprint SERVER-URL[:PORT]; x'
It depends on the used protocol whether encrypted communication is possible, and which
configuration steps have to be taken to enable it. Some protocols, like POP3S, are
implicitly encrypted, others, like POP3, can upgrade a plain text connection if so
requested. For example, to use the ‘STLS’ that POP3 offers (a member of) the variable
(chain) pop3-use-starttls needs to be set, with convenience via shortcut:
shortcut encpop1 pop3s://pop1.exam.ple
shortcut encpop2 pop3://pop2.exam.ple
set pop3-use-starttls-pop2.exam.ple
set mta=smtps://smtp.exam.ple:465
set mta=smtp://smtp.exam.ple smtp-use-starttls
Normally that is all there is to do, given that TLS libraries try to provide safe defaults,
plenty of knobs however exist to adjust settings. For example certificate verification
settings can be fine-tuned via tls-ca-flags, and the TLS configuration basics are accessible
via tls-config-pairs, for example to control protocol versions or cipher lists. In the past
hints on how to restrict the set of protocols to highly secure ones were indicated, but as
of the time of this writing the list of protocols or ciphers may need to become relaxed in
order to be able to connect to some servers; the following example allows connecting to a
“Lion” that uses OpenSSL 0.9.8za from June 2014 (refer to INTERNAL VARIABLES for more on
variable chains):
wysh set tls-config-pairs-lion@exam.ple='MinProtocol=TLSv1.1,\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:\
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA:\
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:@STRENGTH'
The OpenSSL program ciphers(1) should be referred to when creating a custom cipher list.
Variables of interest for TLS in general are tls-ca-dir, tls-ca-file, tls-ca-flags,
tls-ca-no-defaults, tls-config-file, tls-config-module, tls-config-pairs, tls-crl-dir,
tls-crl-file, tls-rand-file as well as tls-verify. Also see tls-features. TLS is available
if ‘+tls’ is included in features.
Character sets
[Option] The user's locale environment is detected by looking at the LC_ALL environment
variable. The internal variable ttycharset will be set to the detected terminal character
set accordingly, and will thus show up in the output of commands like set and varshow. This
character set will be targeted when trying to display data, and user input data is expected
to be in this character set, too.
When creating messages their character input data is classified. 7-bit clean text data and
attachments will be classified as charset-7bit. 8-bit data will [Option]ally be converted
into members of sendcharsets until a character set conversion succeeds. charset-8bit is the
implied default last member of this list. If no 8-bit character set is capable to represent
input data, no message will be sent, and its text will optionally be saved in DEAD. If that
is not acceptable, for example in script environments, mime-force-sendout can be set to
force sending of non-convertible data as ‘application/octet-stream’ classified binary
content instead: like this receivers still have the option to inspect message content (for
example via mime-counter-evidence). If the [Option]al character set conversion is not
available (features misses ‘,+iconv,’), ttycharset is the only supported character set for
non 7-bit clean data, and it is simply assumed it can be used to exchange 8-bit messages.
ttycharset may also be given an explicit value to send mail in a completely “faked” locale
environment, which can be used to generate and send for example 8-bit UTF-8 input data in a
pure 7-bit US-ASCII ‘LC_ALL=C’ environment (an example of this can be found in the section
On sending mail, and non-interactive mode). Due to lack of programming interfaces reading
mail will not really work as expected in a faked environment: whereas ttycharset might be
addressable, any output will be made safely printable, as via vexpr makeprint, according to
the actual locale environment, which is not affected by ttycharset.
Classifying 7-bit clean data as charset-7bit is a problem if the input character set
(ttycharset) is a multibyte character set that is itself 7-bit clean. For example, the
Japanese character set ISO-2022-JP is, but is capable to encode the rich set of Japanese
Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters: in order to notify receivers of this character set
the mail message must be MIME encoded so that the character set ISO-2022-JP can be
advertised, otherwise an invalid email message would result! To achieve this, the variable
charset-7bit can be set to ISO-2022-JP. (Today a better approach regarding email is the
usage of UTF-8, which uses 8-bit bytes for non-US-ASCII data.)
When replying to a message and the variable reply-in-same-charset is set, the character set
of the message being replied to is tried first as a target character set (still being a
subject of charsetalias filtering, however). Another opportunity is
sendcharsets-else-ttycharset to reflect the user's locale environment automatically, it will
treat ttycharset as an implied member of (an unset) sendcharsets.
[Option] When reading messages, their text data is converted into ttycharset as necessary in
order to display them on the user's terminal. Unprintable characters and invalid byte
sequences are detected and replaced by substitution characters. Character set mappings for
source character sets can be established with charsetalias, which may be handy to work
around faulty or incomplete character set catalogues (one could for example add a missing
LATIN1 to ISO-8859-1 mapping), or to enforce treatment of one character set as another one
(“interpret LATIN1 as CP1252”). Also see charset-unknown-8bit to deal with another hairy
aspect of message interpretation.
In general, if a message saying “cannot convert from a to b” appears, either some characters
are not appropriate for the currently selected (terminal) character set, or the needed
conversion is not supported by the system. In the first case, it is necessary to set an
appropriate LC_CTYPE locale and/or the variable ttycharset. The best results are usually
achieved when running in a UTF-8 locale on a UTF-8 capable terminal, in which case the full
Unicode spectrum of characters is available. In this setup characters from various
countries can be displayed, while it is still possible to use more simple character sets for
sending to retain maximum compatibility with older mail clients.
On the other hand the POSIX standard defines a locale-independent 7-bit “portable character
set” that should be used when overall portability is an issue, the even more restricted
subset named “portable filename character set” consists of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, period ‘.’,
underscore ‘_’ and hyphen-minus ‘-’.
Message states
S-nail differentiates in between several message states; the current state will be reflected
in the summary of headers if the attrlist of the configured headline allows, and Specifying
messages dependent on their state is possible. When operating on the system inbox, or in
any other primary system mailbox, special actions, like the automatic moving of messages to
the secondary mailbox MBOX, may be applied when the mailbox is left (also implicitly by
program termination, unless the command exit was used) – however, because this may be
irritating to users which are used to “more modern” mail-user-agents, the provided global
s-nail.rc template sets the internal hold and keepsave variables in order to suppress this
behaviour.
‘new’ Message has neither been viewed nor moved to any other state. Such messages are
retained even in the primary system mailbox.
‘unread’ Message has neither been viewed nor moved to any other state, but the message was
present already when the mailbox has been opened last: Such messages are retained
even in the primary system mailbox.
‘read’ The message has been processed by one of the following commands: ~f, ~m, ~F, ~M,
copy, mbox, next, pipe, Print, print, top, Type, type, undelete. The commands dp
and dt will always try to automatically “step” and type the “next” logical
message, and may thus mark multiple messages as read, the delete command will do
so if the internal variable autoprint is set.
Except when the exit command is used, messages that are in a primary system
mailbox and are in ‘read’ state when the mailbox is left will be saved in the
secondary mailbox MBOX unless the internal variable hold it set.
‘deleted’ The message has been processed by one of the following commands: delete, dp, dt.
Only undelete can be used to access such messages.
‘preserved’ The message has been processed by a preserve command and it will be retained in
its current location.
‘saved’ The message has been processed by one of the following commands: save or write.
Unless when the exit command is used, messages that are in a primary system
mailbox and are in ‘saved’ state when the mailbox is left will be deleted; they
will be saved in the secondary mailbox MBOX when the internal variable keepsave is
set.
In addition to these message states, flags which otherwise have no technical meaning in the
mail system except allowing special ways of addressing them when Specifying messages can be
set on messages. These flags are saved with messages and are thus persistent, and are
portable between a set of widely used MUAs.
answered Mark messages as having been answered.
draft Mark messages as being a draft.
flag Mark messages which need special attention.
Specifying messages
[Only new quoting rules] COMMANDS which take Message list arguments, such as search, type,
copy, and delete, can perform actions on a number of messages at once. Specifying invalid
messages, or using illegal syntax, will cause errors to be reported through the INTERNAL
VARIABLES !, ^ERR and companions, as well as the command exit status ?.
For example, ‘delete 1 2’ deletes the messages 1 and 2, whereas ‘delete 1-5’ will delete the
messages 1 through 5. In sorted or threaded mode (see the sort command), ‘delete 1-5’ will
delete the messages that are located between (and including) messages 1 through 5 in the
sorted/threaded order, as shown in the headers summary.
Errors can for example be ^ERR-BADMSG when requesting an invalid message, ^ERR-NOMSG if no
applicable message can be found, ^ERR-CANCELED for missing informational data (mostly
thread-related). ^ERR-INVAL for invalid syntax as well as ^ERR-IO for input/output errors
can happen. The following special message names exist:
. The current message, the so-called “dot”.
; The message that was previously the current message; needs to be quoted.
, The parent message of the current message, that is the message with the Message-ID
given in the ‘In-Reply-To:’ field or the last entry of the ‘References:’ field of
the current message.
- The previous undeleted message, or the previous deleted message for the undelete
command; In sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the previous such message in the according
order.
+ The next undeleted message, or the next deleted message for the undelete command;
In sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the next such message in the according order.
^ The first undeleted message, or the first deleted message for the undelete
command; In sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the first such message in the according
order.
$ The last message; In sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the last such message in the
according order. Needs to be quoted.
&x In ‘thread’ed sort mode, selects the message addressed with x, where x is any
other message specification, and all messages from the thread that begins at it.
Otherwise it is identical to x. If x is omitted, the thread beginning with the
current message is selected.
* All messages.
` All messages that were included in the Message list arguments of the previous
command; needs to be quoted. (A convenient way to read all new messages is to
select them via ‘from :n’, as below, and then to read them in order with the
default command — next — simply by successively typing ‘`’; for this to work
showlast must be set.)
x-y An inclusive range of message numbers. Selectors that may also be used as
endpoints include any of .;-+^$.
address A case-insensitive “any substring matches” search against the ‘From:’ header,
which will match addresses (too) even if showname is set (and POSIX says “any
address as shown in a header summary shall be matchable in this form”); However,
if the allnet variable is set, only the local part of the address is evaluated for
the comparison, not ignoring case, and the setting of showname is completely
ignored. For finer control and match boundaries use the ‘@’ search expression.
/string All messages that contain string in the subject field (case ignored according to
locale). See also the searchheaders variable. If string is empty, the string
from the previous specification of that type is used again.
[@name-list]@expr
All messages that contain the given case-insensitive search expression; If the
[Option]al regular expression support is available expr will be interpreted as (an
extended) one if any of the magic regular expression characters is seen. If the
optional @name-list part is missing the search is restricted to the subject field
body, but otherwise name-list specifies a comma-separated list of header fields to
search, for example
'@to,from,cc@Someone i ought to know'
In order to search for a string that includes a ‘@’ (commercial at) character the
name-list is effectively non-optional, but may be given as the empty string.
Also, specifying an empty search expression will effectively test for existence of
the given header fields. Some special header fields may be abbreviated: ‘f’, ‘t’,
‘c’, ‘b’ and ‘s’ will match ‘From’, ‘To’, ‘Cc’, ‘Bcc’ and ‘Subject’, respectively
and case-insensitively. [Option]ally, and just like expr, name-list will be
interpreted as (an extended) regular expression if any of the magic regular
expression characters is seen.
The special names ‘header’ or ‘<’ can be used to search in (all of) the header(s)
of the message, and the special names ‘body’ or ‘>’ and ‘text’ or ‘=’ will perform
full text searches – whereas the former searches only the body, the latter also
searches the message header ([v15 behaviour may differ] this mode yet brute force
searches over the entire decoded content of messages, including administrativa
strings).
This specification performs full text comparison, but even with regular expression
support it is almost impossible to write a search expression that safely matches
only a specific address domain. To request that the body content of the header is
treated as a list of addresses, and to strip those down to the plain email address
which the search expression is to be matched against, prefix the effective
name-list with a tilde ‘~’:
'@~f,c@@a\.safe\.domain\.match$'
:c All messages of state or with matching condition ‘c’, where ‘c’ is one or multiple
of the following colon modifiers:
a answered messages (cf. the variable markanswered).
d ‘deleted’ messages (for the undelete and from commands only).
f flagged messages.
L Messages with receivers that match mlsubscribed addresses.
l Messages with receivers that match mlisted addresses.
n ‘new’ messages.
o Old messages (any not in state ‘read’ or ‘new’).
r ‘read’ messages.
S [Option] Messages with unsure spam classification (see Handling spam).
s [Option] Messages classified as spam.
t Messages marked as draft.
u ‘unread’ messages.
[Option] IMAP-style SEARCH expressions may also be used. These consist of keywords and
criterions, and because Message list arguments are split into tokens according to
Shell-style argument quoting it is necessary to quote the entire IMAP search expression in
order to ensure that it remains a single token. This addressing mode is available with all
types of mailbox folders; S-nail will perform the search locally as necessary. Strings must
be enclosed by double quotation marks ‘"’ in their entirety if they contain whitespace or
parentheses; within the quotes, only reverse solidus ‘\’ is recognized as an escape
character. All string searches are case-insensitive. When the description indicates that
the “envelope” representation of an address field is used, this means that the search string
is checked against both a list constructed as
'("name" "source" "local-part" "domain-part")'
for each address, and the addresses without real names from the respective header field.
These search expressions can be nested using parentheses, see below for examples.
(criterion)
All messages that satisfy the given criterion.
(criterion1 criterion2 ... criterionN)
All messages that satisfy all of the given criteria.
(or criterion1 criterion2)
All messages that satisfy either criterion1 or criterion2, or both. To connect
more than two criteria using ‘or’ specifications have to be nested using
additional parentheses, as with ‘(or a (or b c))’, since ‘(or a b c)’ really means
‘((a or b) and c)’. For a simple ‘or’ operation of independent criteria on the
lowest nesting level, it is possible to achieve similar effects by using three
separate criteria, as with ‘(a) (b) (c)’.
(not criterion)
All messages that do not satisfy criterion.
(bcc "string")
All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘Bcc:’
field.
(cc "string")
All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘Cc:’
field.
(from "string")
All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘From:’
field.
(subject "string")
All messages that contain string in the ‘Subject:’ field.
(to "string")
All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘To:’
field.
(header name "string")
All messages that contain string in the specified ‘Name:’ field.
(body "string")
All messages that contain string in their body.
(text "string")
All messages that contain string in their header or body.
(larger size)
All messages that are larger than size (in bytes).
(smaller size)
All messages that are smaller than size (in bytes).
(before date)
All messages that were received before date, which must be in the form
‘d[d]-mon-yyyy’, where ‘d’ denotes the day of the month as one or two digits,
‘mon’ is the name of the month – one of ‘Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct
Nov Dec’, and ‘yyyy’ is the year as four digits, for example ‘28-Dec-2012’.
(on date)
All messages that were received on the specified date.
(since date)
All messages that were received since the specified date.
(sentbefore date)
All messages that were sent on the specified date.
(senton date)
All messages that were sent on the specified date.
(sentsince date)
All messages that were sent since the specified date.
() The same criterion as for the previous search. This specification cannot be used
as part of another criterion. If the previous command line contained more than
one independent criterion then the last of those criteria is used.
On terminal control and line editor
[Option] Terminal control through one of the standard UNIX libraries, Termcap Access Library
(libtermcap, -ltermcap) or Terminal Information Library (libterminfo, -lterminfo), may be
available. For the TERMinal defined in the environment interactive usage aspects, for
example Coloured display, and insight of cursor and function keys for the Mailx-Line-Editor
(MLE), will be enhanced or enabled. Library interaction can be disabled on a per-invocation
basis via termcap-disable, whereas the internal variable termcap is always used as a
preferred source of terminal capabilities. (For a usage example see the FAQ entry Not
"defunctional", but the editor key does not work.)
[Option] The built-in Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE) should work in all environments which comply
to the ISO C standard ISO/IEC 9899/AMD1:1995 (“ISO C90, Amendment 1”), and will support wide
glyphs if possible (the necessary functionality had been removed from ISO C, but was
included in X/Open Portability Guide Issue 4 (“XPG4”)). Usage of a line editor in
interactive mode can be prevented by setting line-editor-disable. Especially if the
[Option]al terminal control support is missing setting entries in termcap will help shall
the MLE misbehave, see there for more. The MLE can support a little bit of colour.
[Option] If the history feature is available then input from line editor prompts will be
saved in a history list that can be searched in and be expanded from. Such saving can be
prevented by prefixing input with any amount of whitespace. Aspects of history, like
allowed content and maximum size, as well as whether history shall be saved persistently,
can be configured with the internal variables history-file, history-gabby,
history-gabby-persist and history-size. There also exists the macro hook
on-history-addition which can be used to apply finer control on what enters history.
The MLE supports a set of editing and control commands. By default (as) many (as possible)
of these will be assigned to a set of single-letter control codes, which should work on any
terminal (and can be generated by holding the “control” key while pressing the key of
desire, for example ‘control-D’). If the [Option]al bind command is available then the MLE
commands can also be accessed freely by assigning the command name, which is shown in
parenthesis in the list below, to any desired key-sequence, and the MLE will instead and
also use bind to establish its built-in key bindings (more of them if the [Option]al
terminal control is available), an action which can then be suppressed completely by setting
line-editor-no-defaults. Shell-style argument quoting notation is used in the following:
‘\cA’ Go to the start of the line (mle-go-home).
‘\cB’ Move the cursor backward one character (mle-go-bwd).
‘\cC’ raise(3) ‘SIGINT’ (mle-raise-int).
‘\cD’ Forward delete the character under the cursor; quits S-nail if used on the empty
line unless the internal variable ignoreeof is set (mle-del-fwd).
‘\cE’ Go to the end of the line (mle-go-end).
‘\cF’ Move the cursor forward one character (mle-go-fwd).
‘\cG’ Cancel current operation, full reset. If there is an active history search or
tabulator expansion then this command will first reset that, reverting to the
former line content; thus a second reset is needed for a full reset in this case
(mle-reset).
‘\cH’ Backspace: backward delete one character (mle-del-bwd).
‘\cI’ [Only new quoting rules] Horizontal tabulator: try to expand the word before the
cursor, supporting the usual Filename transformations (mle-complete; this is
affected by mle-quote-rndtrip and line-editor-cpl-word-breaks).
‘\cJ’ Newline: commit the current line (mle-commit).
‘\cK’ Cut all characters from the cursor to the end of the line (mle-snarf-end).
‘\cL’ Repaint the line (mle-repaint).
‘\cN’ [Option] Go to the next history entry (mle-hist-fwd).
‘\cO’ ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command dt.
‘\cP’ [Option] Go to the previous history entry (mle-hist-bwd).
‘\cQ’ Toggle roundtrip mode shell quotes, where produced, on and off
(mle-quote-rndtrip). This setting is temporary, and will be forgotten once the
command line is committed; also see shcodec.
‘\cR’ [Option] Complete the current line from (the remaining) older history entries
(mle-hist-srch-bwd).
‘\cS’ [Option] Complete the current line from (the remaining) newer history entries
(mle-hist-srch-fwd).
‘\cT’ Paste the snarf buffer (mle-paste).
‘\cU’ The same as ‘\cA’ followed by ‘\cK’ (mle-snarf-line).
‘\cV’ Prompts for a Unicode character (hexadecimal number without prefix, see vexpr) to
be inserted (mle-prompt-char). Note this command needs to be assigned to a
single-letter control code in order to become recognized and executed during input
of a key-sequence (only three single-letter control codes can be used for that
shortcut purpose); this control code is then special-treated and thus cannot be
part of any other sequence (because it will trigger the mle-prompt-char function
immediately).
‘\cW’ Cut the characters from the one preceding the cursor to the preceding word
boundary (mle-snarf-word-bwd).
‘\cX’ Move the cursor forward one word boundary (mle-go-word-fwd).
‘\cY’ Move the cursor backward one word boundary (mle-go-word-bwd).
‘\cZ’ raise(3) ‘SIGTSTP’ (mle-raise-tstp).
‘\c[’ Escape: reset a possibly used multibyte character input state machine and
[Option]ally a lingering, incomplete key binding (mle-cancel). This command needs
to be assigned to a single-letter control code in order to become recognized and
executed during input of a key-sequence (only three single-letter control codes
can be used for that shortcut purpose). This control code may also be part of a
multi-byte sequence, but if a sequence is active and the very control code is
currently also an expected input, then the active sequence takes precedence and
will consume the control code.
‘\c\’ ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z+’.
‘\c]’ ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z$’.
‘\c^’ ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z0’.
‘\c_’ Cut the characters from the one after the cursor to the succeeding word boundary
(mle-snarf-word-fwd).
‘\c?’ Backspace: mle-del-bwd.
– mle-bell: ring the audible bell.
– [Option] mle-clear-screen: move the cursor home and clear the screen.
– mle-fullreset: different to mle-reset this will immediately reset a possibly
active search etc.
– mle-go-screen-bwd: move the cursor backward one screen width.
– mle-go-screen-fwd: move the cursor forward one screen width.
– mle-raise-quit: raise(3) ‘SIGQUIT’.
Coloured display
[Option] Colours and font attributes through ANSI a.k.a. ISO 6429 SGR (select graphic
rendition) escape sequences are optionally supported. Usage of colours and font attributes
solely depends upon the capability of the detected terminal type (TERM), and as fine-tuned
through termcap. Colours and font attributes can be managed with the multiplexer command
colour, and uncolour removes the given mappings. Setting colour-disable suppresses usage of
colour and font attribute sequences, while leaving established mappings unchanged.
Whether actually applicable colour and font attribute sequences should also be generated
when output is going to be paged through the external PAGER (also see crt) depends upon the
setting of colour-pager, because pagers usually need to be configured in order to support
ISO escape sequences. Knowledge of some widely used pagers is however built-in, and in a
clean environment it is often enough to simply set colour-pager; please refer to that
variable for more on this topic.
It might make sense to conditionalize colour setup on interactive mode via if (‘terminal’
indeed means “interactive”):
if terminal && "$features" =% ,+colour,
colour iso view-msginfo ft=bold,fg=green
colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=red (from|subject) # regex
colour iso view-header fg=red
uncolour iso view-header from,subject
colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=magenta,bg=cyan
colour 256 view-header ft=bold,fg=208,bg=230 "subject,from"
colour mono view-header ft=bold
colour mono view-header ft=bold,ft=reverse subject,from
endif
Handling spam
[Option] S-nail can make use of several spam interfaces for the purpose of identification
of, and, in general, dealing with spam messages. A precondition of most commands in order
to function is that the spam-interface variable is set to one of the supported interfaces.
Specifying messages that have been identified as spam is possible via their (volatile)
‘is-spam’ state by using the ‘:s’ and ‘:S’ specifications, and their attrlist entries will
be used when displaying the headline in the summary of headers.
• spamrate rates the given messages and sets their ‘is-spam’ flag accordingly. If the
spam interface offers spam scores these can be shown in headline by using the format
‘%$’.
• spamham, spamspam and spamforget will interact with the Bayesian filter of the chosen
interface and learn the given messages as “ham” or “spam”, respectively; the last
command can be used to cause “unlearning” of messages; it adheres to their current
‘is-spam’ state and thus reverts previous teachings.
• spamclear and spamset will simply set and clear, respectively, the mentioned volatile
‘is-spam’ message flag, without any interface interaction.
The spamassassin(1) based spam-interface ‘spamc’ requires a running instance of the spamd(1)
server in order to function, started with the option --allow-tell shall Bayesian filter
learning be possible.
$ spamd -i localhost:2142 -i /tmp/.spamsock -d [-L] [-l]
$ spamd --listen=localhost:2142 --listen=/tmp/.spamsock \
--daemonize [--local] [--allow-tell]
Thereafter S-nail can make use of these interfaces:
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
-Sspamc-arguments="-U /tmp/.spamsock" -Sspamc-user=
or
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
-Sspamc-arguments="-d localhost -p 2142" -Sspamc-user=
Using the generic filter approach allows usage of programs like bogofilter(1). Here is an
example, requiring it to be accessible via PATH:
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=filter -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamfilter-ham="bogofilter -n" \
-Sspamfilter-noham="bogofilter -N" \
-Sspamfilter-nospam="bogofilter -S" \
-Sspamfilter-rate="bogofilter -TTu 2>/dev/null" \
-Sspamfilter-spam="bogofilter -s" \
-Sspamfilter-rate-scanscore="1;^(.+)$"
Because messages must exist on local storage in order to be scored (or used for Bayesian
filter training), it is possibly a good idea to perform the local spam check last. Spam can
be checked automatically when opening specific folders by setting a specialized form of the
internal variable folder-hook.
define spamdelhook {
# Server side DCC
spamset (header x-dcc-brand-metrics "bulk")
# Server-side spamassassin(1)
spamset (header x-spam-flag "YES")
del :s # TODO we HAVE to be able to do `spamrate :u ! :sS'
move :S +maybe-spam
spamrate :u
del :s
move :S +maybe-spam
}
set folder-hook-SOMEFOLDER=spamdelhook
See also the documentation for the variables spam-interface, spam-maxsize, spamc-command,
spamc-arguments, spamc-user, spamfilter-ham, spamfilter-noham, spamfilter-nospam,
spamfilter-rate and spamfilter-rate-scanscore.
COMMANDS
S-nail reads input in lines. An unquoted reverse solidus ‘\’ at the end of a command line
“escapes” the newline character: it is discarded and the next line of input is used as a
follow-up line, with all leading whitespace removed; once an entire line is completed, the
whitespace characters space, tabulator, newline as well as those defined by the variable ifs
are removed from the beginning and end. Placing any whitespace characters at the beginning
of a line will prevent a possible addition of the command line to the [Option]al history.
The beginning of such input lines is then scanned for the name of a known command: command
names may be abbreviated, in which case the first command that matches the given prefix will
be used. Command modifiers may prefix a command in order to modify its behaviour. A name
may also be a commandalias, which will become expanded until no more expansion is possible.
Once the command that shall be executed is known, the remains of the input line will be
interpreted according to command-specific rules, documented in the following.
This behaviour is different to the sh(1)ell, which is a programming language with syntactic
elements of clearly defined semantics, and therefore capable to sequentially expand and
evaluate individual elements of a line. ‘? set one=value two=$one’ for example will never
possibly assign value to one, because the variable assignment is performed no sooner but by
the command (set), long after the expansion happened.
A list of all commands in lookup order is dumped by the command list. [Option]ally the
command help (or ?), when given an argument, will show a documentation string for the
command matching the expanded argument, as in ‘?t’, which should be a shorthand of ‘?type’;
with these documentation strings both commands support a more verbose listing mode which
includes the argument type of the command and other information which applies; a handy
suggestion might thus be:
? define __xv {
# Before v15: need to enable sh(1)ell-style on _entire_ line!
localopts yes;wysh set verbose;ignerr eval "${@}";return ${?}
}
? commandalias xv '\call __xv'
? xv help set
Command modifiers
Commands may be prefixed by none to multiple command modifiers. Some command modifiers can
be used with a restricted set of commands only, the verbose version of list will
([Option]ally) show which modifiers apply.
• The modifier reverse solidus \, to be placed first, prevents commandalias expansions on
the remains of the line, for example ‘\echo’ will always evaluate the command echo, even
if an (command)alias of the same name exists. commandalias content may itself contain
further command modifiers, including an initial reverse solidus to prevent further
expansions.
• The modifier ignerr indicates that any error generated by the following command should
be ignored by the state machine and not cause a program exit with enabled errexit or for
the standardized exit cases in posix mode. ?, one of the INTERNAL VARIABLES, will be
set to the real exit status of the command regardless.
• local will alter the called command to apply changes only temporarily, local to block-
scope, and can thus only be used inside of a defined macro or an account definition.
Specifying it implies the modifier wysh. Local variables will not be inherited by
macros deeper in the call chain, and all local settings will be garbage collected once
the local scope is left. To record and unroll changes in the global scope use the
command localopts.
• scope does yet not implement any functionality.
• u does yet not implement any functionality.
• Some commands support the vput modifier: if used, they expect the name of a variable,
which can itself be a variable, i.e., shell expansion is applied, as their first
argument, and will place their computation result in it instead of the default location
(it is usually written to standard output).
The given name will be tested for being a valid sh(1) variable name, and may therefore
only consist of upper- and lowercase characters, digits, and the underscore; the hyphen-
minus may be used as a non-portable extension; digits may not be used as first, hyphen-
minus may not be used as last characters. In addition the name may either not be one of
the known INTERNAL VARIABLES, or must otherwise refer to a writable (non-boolean) value
variable. The actual put operation may fail nonetheless, for example if the variable
expects a number argument only a number will be accepted. Any error during these
operations causes the command as such to fail, and the error number ! will be set to
^ERR-NOTSUP, the exit status ? should be set to ‘-1’, but some commands deviate from the
latter, which is documented.
• Last, but not least, the modifier wysh can be used for some old and established commands
to choose the new Shell-style argument quoting rules over the traditional Old-style
argument quoting. This modifier is implied if v15-compat is set to a non-empty value.
Old-style argument quoting
[v15 behaviour may differ] This section documents the traditional and POSIX standardized
style of quoting non-message list arguments to commands which expect this type of arguments:
whereas still used by the majority of such commands, the new Shell-style argument quoting
may be available even for those via wysh, one of the Command modifiers. Nonetheless care
must be taken, because only new commands have been designed with all the capabilities of the
new quoting rules in mind, which can, for example generate control characters.
• An argument can be enclosed between paired double-quotes ‘"argument"’ or single-
quotes ‘'argument'’; any whitespace, shell word expansion, or reverse solidus
characters (except as described next) within the quotes are treated literally as
part of the argument. A double-quote will be treated literally within single-
quotes and vice versa. Inside such a quoted string the actually used quote
character can be used nonetheless by escaping it with a reverse solidus ‘\’, as in
‘"y\"ou"’.
• An argument that is not enclosed in quotes, as above, can usually still contain
space characters if those spaces are reverse solidus escaped, as in ‘you\ are’.
• A reverse solidus outside of the enclosing quotes is discarded and the following
character is treated literally as part of the argument.
Shell-style argument quoting
sh(1)ell-style, and therefore POSIX standardized, argument parsing and quoting rules are
used by most commands. [v15 behaviour may differ] Most new commands only support these new
rules and are flagged [Only new quoting rules], some elder ones can use them with the
command modifier wysh; in the future only this type of argument quoting will remain.
A command line is parsed from left to right and an input token is completed whenever an
unquoted, otherwise ignored, metacharacter is seen. Metacharacters are vertical bar |,
ampersand &, semicolon ;, as well as all characters from the variable ifs, and / or space,
tabulator, newline. The additional metacharacters left and right parenthesis (, ) and less-
than and greater-than signs <, > that the sh(1) supports are not used, and are treated as
ordinary characters: for one these characters are a vivid part of email addresses, and it
seems highly unlikely that their function will become meaningful to S-nail.
Compatibility note: [v15 behaviour may differ] Please note that even many new-style
commands do not yet honour ifs to parse their arguments: whereas the sh(1)ell is a
language with syntactic elements of clearly defined semantics, S-nail parses entire
input lines and decides on a per-command base what to do with the rest of the line.
This also means that whenever an unknown command is seen all that S-nail can do is
cancellation of the processing of the remains of the line.
It also often depends on an actual subcommand of a multiplexer command how the rest of
the line should be treated, and until v15 we are not capable to perform this deep
inspection of arguments. Nonetheless, at least the following commands which work with
positional parameters fully support ifs for an almost shell-compatible field
splitting: call, call_if, read, vpospar, xcall.
Any unquoted number sign ‘#’ at the beginning of a new token starts a comment that extends
to the end of the line, and therefore ends argument processing. An unquoted dollar sign ‘$’
will cause variable expansion of the given name, which must be a valid sh(1)ell-style
variable name (see vput): INTERNAL VARIABLES as well as ENVIRONMENT (shell) variables can be
accessed through this mechanism, brace enclosing the name is supported (i.e., to subdivide a
token).
Whereas the metacharacters space, tabulator, newline only complete an input token, vertical
bar |, ampersand & and semicolon ; also act as control operators and perform control
functions. For now supported is semicolon ;, which terminates a single command, therefore
sequencing the command line and making the remainder of the line a subject to reevaluation.
With sequencing, multiple command argument types and quoting rules may therefore apply to a
single line, which can become problematic before v15: e.g., the first of the following will
cause surprising results.
? echo one; set verbose; echo verbose=$verbose.
? echo one; wysh set verbose; echo verbose=$verbose.
Quoting is a mechanism that will remove the special meaning of metacharacters and reserved
words, and will prevent expansion. There are four quoting mechanisms: the escape character,
single-quotes, double-quotes and dollar-single-quotes:
• The literal value of any character can be preserved by preceding it with the
escape character reverse solidus ‘\’.
• Arguments which are enclosed in ‘'single-quotes'’ retain their literal value. A
single-quote cannot occur within single-quotes.
• The literal value of all characters enclosed in ‘"double-quotes"’ is retained,
with the exception of dollar sign ‘$’, which will cause variable expansion, as
above, backquote (grave accent) ‘`’, (which not yet means anything special),
reverse solidus ‘\’, which will escape any of the characters dollar sign ‘$’ (to
prevent variable expansion), backquote (grave accent) ‘`’, double-quote ‘"’ (to
prevent ending the quote) and reverse solidus ‘\’ (to prevent escaping, i.e., to
embed a reverse solidus character as-is), but has no special meaning otherwise.
• Arguments enclosed in ‘$'dollar-single-quotes'’ extend normal single quotes in
that reverse solidus escape sequences are expanded as follows:
‘\a’ bell control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BEL).
‘\b’ backspace control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BS).
‘\E’ escape control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 ESC).
‘\e’ the same.
‘\f’ form feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 FF).
‘\n’ line feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 LF).
‘\r’ carriage return control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 CR).
‘\t’ horizontal tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 HT).
‘\v’ vertical tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 VT).
‘\\’ emits a reverse solidus character.
‘\'’ single quote.
‘\"’ double quote (escaping is optional).
‘\NNN’ eight-bit byte with the octal value ‘NNN’ (one to three octal digits),
optionally prefixed by an additional ‘0’. A 0 byte will suppress further
output for the quoted argument.
‘\xHH’ eight-bit byte with the hexadecimal value ‘HH’ (one or two hexadecimal
characters, no prefix, see vexpr). A 0 byte will suppress further output
for the quoted argument.
‘\UHHHHHHHH’
the Unicode / ISO-10646 character with the hexadecimal codepoint value
‘HHHHHHHH’ (one to eight hexadecimal characters) — note that Unicode
defines the maximum codepoint ever to be supported as ‘0x10FFFF’ (in
planes of ‘0xFFFF’ characters each). This escape is only supported in
locales that support Unicode (see Character sets), in other cases the
sequence will remain unexpanded unless the given code point is ASCII
compatible or (if the [Option]al character set conversion is available)
can be represented in the current locale. The character NUL will suppress
further output for the quoted argument.
‘\uHHHH’
Identical to ‘\UHHHHHHHH’ except it takes only one to four hexadecimal
characters.
‘\cX’ Emits the non-printable (ASCII and compatible) C0 control codes 0 (NUL) to
31 (US), and 127 (DEL). Printable representations of ASCII control codes
can be created by mapping them to a different, visible part of the ASCII
character set. Adding the number 64 achieves this for the codes 0 to 31,
here 7 (BEL): ‘7 + 64 = 71 = G’. The real operation is a bitwise logical
XOR with 64 (bit 7 set, see vexpr), thus also covering code 127 (DEL),
which is mapped to 63 (question mark): ‘? vexpr ^ 127 64’.
Whereas historically circumflex notation has often been used for
visualization purposes of control codes, as in ‘^G’, the reverse solidus
notation has been standardized: ‘\cG’. Some control codes also have
standardized (ISO-10646, ISO C) aliases, as shown above (‘\a’, ‘\n’, ‘\t’
etc) : whenever such an alias exists it will be used for display purposes.
The control code NUL (‘\c@’, a non-standard extension) will suppress
further output for the remains of the token (which may extend beyond the
current quote), or, depending on the context, the remains of all arguments
for the current command.
‘\$NAME’
Non-standard extension: expand the given variable name, as above. Brace
enclosing the name is supported.
‘\`{command}’
Not yet supported, just to raise awareness: Non-standard extension.
Caveats:
? echo 'Quotes '${HOME}' and 'tokens" differ!"# no comment
? echo Quotes ${HOME} and tokens differ! # comment
? echo Don"'"t you worry$'\x21' The sun shines on us. $'\u263A'
Message list arguments
Many commands operate on message list specifications, as documented in Specifying messages.
The argument input is first split into individual tokens via Shell-style argument quoting,
which are then interpreted as the mentioned specifications. If no explicit message list has
been specified, many commands will search for and use the next message forward that
satisfies the commands' requirements, and if there are no messages forward of the current
message, the search proceeds backwards; if there are no good messages at all to be found, an
error message is shown and the command is aborted. The verbose output of the command list
will indicate whether a command searches for a default message, or not.
Raw data arguments for codec commands
A special set of commands, which all have the string “codec” in their name, like addrcodec,
shcodec, urlcodec, take raw string data as input, which means that the content of the
command input line is passed completely unexpanded and otherwise unchanged: like this the
effect of the actual codec is visible without any noise of possible shell quoting rules
etc., i.e., the user can input one-to-one the desired or questionable data. To gain a level
of expansion, the entire command line can be evaluated first, for example
? vput shcodec res encode /usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt
? echo $res
$'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
? shcodec d $res
$'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
? eval shcodec d $res
/usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt
Filename transformations
Filenames, where expected, and unless documented otherwise, are subsequently subject to the
following filename transformations, in sequence:
• If the given name is a registered shortcut, it will be replaced with the expanded
shortcut. This step is mostly taken for folders only.
• The filename is matched against the following patterns or strings. But for plus
+file folder expansion this step is mostly taken for folders only.
# (Number sign) is expanded to the previous file.
% (Percent sign) is replaced by the invoking user's primary system mailbox,
which either is the (itself expandable) inbox if that is set, the
standardized absolute pathname indicated by MAIL if that is set, or a
built-in compile-time default otherwise. When opening a folder the used
name is actively checked for being a primary mailbox, first against inbox,
then against MAIL.
%user Expands to the primary system mailbox of user (and never the value of
inbox, regardless of its actual setting).
& (Ampersand) is replaced with the invoking user's secondary mailbox, the
MBOX.
+file Refers to a file in the folder directory (if that variable is set).
%:filespec Expands to the same value as filespec, but has special meaning when
used with, for example, the command folder: the file will be treated as a
primary system mailbox by, among others, the mbox and save commands,
meaning that messages that have been read in the current session will be
moved to the MBOX mailbox instead of simply being flagged as read.
• Meta expansions may be applied to the resulting filename, as allowed by the
operation and applicable to the resulting access protocol (also see On URL syntax
and credential lookup). For the file-protocol, a leading tilde ‘~’ character will
be replaced by the expansion of HOME, except when followed by a valid user name,
in which case the home directory of the given user is used instead.
A shell expansion as if specified in double-quotes (see Shell-style argument
quoting) may be applied, so that any occurrence of ‘$VARIABLE’ (or ‘${VARIABLE}’)
will be replaced by the expansion of the variable, if possible; INTERNAL VARIABLES
as well as ENVIRONMENT (shell) variables can be accessed through this mechanism.
Shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions (glob(7)) may be applied as documented.
If the fully expanded filename results in multiple pathnames and the command is
expecting only one file, an error results.
In interactive context, in order to allow simple value acceptance (via “ENTER”),
arguments will usually be displayed in a properly quoted form, so a file ‘diet\ is
\curd.txt’ may be displayed as ‘'diet\ is \curd.txt'’.
Commands
The following commands are available:
! Executes the SHELL command which follows, replacing unescaped exclamation marks
with the previously executed command if the internal variable bang is set. This
command supports vput as documented in Command modifiers, and manages the error
number !. A 0 or positive exit status ? reflects the exit status of the command,
negative ones that an error happened before the command was executed, or that the
program did not exit cleanly, but maybe due to a signal: the error number is
^ERR-CHILD, then.
In conjunction with the vput modifier the following special cases exist: a
negative exit status occurs if the collected data could not be stored in the given
variable, which is a ^ERR-NOTSUP error that should otherwise not occur.
^ERR-CANCELED indicates that no temporary file could be created to collect the
command output at first glance. In case of catchable out-of-memory situations
^ERR-NOMEM will occur and S-nail will try to store the empty string, just like
with all other detected error conditions.
# The comment-command causes the entire line to be ignored. Note: this really is a
normal command which' purpose is to discard its arguments, not a “comment-start”
indicating special character, which means that for example trailing comments on a
line are not possible (except for commands which use Shell-style argument
quoting).
+ Goes to the next message in sequence and types it (like “ENTER”).
- Display the preceding message, or the n'th previous message if given a numeric
argument n.
= Shows the message number of the current message (the “dot”) when used without
arguments, that of the given list otherwise. Output numbers will be separated
from each other with the first character of ifs, and followed by the first
character of if-ws, if that is not empty and not identical to the first. If that
results in no separation at all a space character is used. This command supports
vput (see Command modifiers), and manages the error number !.
? [Option] Show a brief summary of commands. [Option] Given an argument a synopsis
for the command in question is shown instead; commands can be abbreviated in
general and this command can be used to see the full expansion of an abbreviation
including the synopsis, try, for example ‘?h’, ‘?hel’ and ‘?help’ and see how the
output changes. To avoid that aliases are resolved the modifier \ can be
prepended to the argument, but note it must be quoted. This mode also supports a
more verbose output, which will provide the information documented for list.
| A synonym for the pipe command.
account, unaccount
(ac, una) Creates, selects or lists (an) account(s). Accounts are special
incarnations of defined macros and group commands and variable settings which
together usually arrange the environment for the purpose of creating an email
account. Different to normal macros settings which are covered by localopts –
here by default enabled! – will not be reverted before the account is changed
again. The special account ‘null’ (case-insensitive) always exists, and all but
it can be deleted by the latter command, and in one operation with the special
name ‘*’. Also for all but it a possibly set on-account-cleanup hook is called
once they are left, also for program exit.
Without arguments a listing of all defined accounts is shown. With one argument
the given account is activated: the system inbox of that account will be activated
(as via folder), a possibly installed folder-hook will be run, and the internal
variable account will be updated. The two argument form behaves identical to
defining a macro as via define. Important settings for accounts include folder,
from, hostname, inbox, mta, password and user (On URL syntax and credential
lookup), as well as things like tls-config-pairs (Encrypted network
communication), and protocol specifics like imap-auth, pop3-auth, smtp-auth.
account myisp {
set folder=~/mail inbox=+syste.mbox record=+sent.mbox
set from='(My Name) myname@myisp.example'
set mta=smtp://mylogin@smtp.myisp.example
}
addrcodec
Perform email address codec transformations on raw-data argument, rather according
to email standards (RFC 5322; [v15 behaviour may differ] will furtherly improve).
Supports vput (see Command modifiers), and manages the error number !. The first
argument must be either [+[+[+]]]e[ncode], d[ecode], s[kin] or skinl[ist] and
specifies the operation to perform on the rest of the line.
Decoding will show how a standard-compliant MUA will display the given argument,
which should be an email address. Please be aware that most MUAs have
difficulties with the address standards, and vary wildly when (comments) in
parenthesis, “double-quoted” strings, or quoted-pairs, as below, become involved.
[v15 behaviour may differ] S-nail currently does not perform decoding when
displaying addresses.
Skinning is identical to decoding but only outputs the plain address, without any
string, comment etc. components. Another difference is that it may fail with the
error number ! set to ^ERR-INVAL if decoding fails to find a(n) (valid) email
address, in which case the unmodified input will be output again.
skinlist first performs a skin operation, and thereafter checks a valid address
for whether it is a registered mailing list (see mlist and mlsubscribe),
eventually reporting that state in the error number ! as ^ERR-EXIST. (This state
could later become overwritten by an I/O error, though.)
Encoding supports four different modes, lesser automated versions can be chosen by
prefixing one, two or three plus signs: the standard imposes a special meaning on
some characters, which thus have to be transformed to so-called quoted-pairs by
pairing them with a reverse solidus ‘\’ in order to remove the special meaning;
this might change interpretation of the entire argument from what has been
desired, however! Specify one plus sign to remark that parenthesis shall be left
alone, two for not turning double quotation marks into quoted-pairs, and three for
also leaving any user-specified reverse solidus alone. The result will always be
valid, if a successful exit status is reported ([v15 behaviour may differ] the
current parser fails this assertion for some constructs). [v15 behaviour may
differ] Addresses need to be specified in between angle brackets ‘<’, ‘>’ if the
construct becomes more difficult, otherwise the current parser will fail; it is
not smart enough to guess right.
? addrc enc "Hey, you",<diet@exam.ple>\ out\ there
"\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
? addrc d "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
"Hey, you", \ out\ there <diet@exam.ple>
? addrc s "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
diet@exam.ple
alias, unalias
[Only new quoting rules](a, una) Define or list, and remove, respectively, address
aliases, which are a method of creating personal distribution lists that map a
single name to none to multiple receivers, to be expanded after Compose mode is
left; the expansion correlates with metoo. The latter command removes all given
aliases, the special name asterisk ‘*’ will remove all existing aliases. When
used without arguments the former shows a list of all currently known aliases,
with one argument only the target(s) of the given one. When given two arguments,
hyphen-minus ‘-’ being the first, the target(s) of the second is/are expanded
recursively.
In all other cases the given alias is newly defined, or will be appended to:
arguments must either be themselves valid alias names, or any other address type
(see On sending mail, and non-interactive mode). Recursive expansion of aliases
can be prevented by prefixing the desired argument with the modifier reverse
solidus \. A valid alias name conforms to mta-aliases syntax, but follow-up
characters can also be the number sign ‘#’, colon ‘:’, commercial at ‘@,’
exclamation mark ‘!’, period ‘.’ as well as “any character that has the high bit
set”. The dollar sign ‘$’ may be the last character. The number sign ‘#’ may
need Shell-style argument quoting.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Unfortunately the colon is currently not supported, as
it interferes with normal address parsing rules. [v15 behaviour may differ] Such
high bit characters will likely cause warnings at the moment for the same reasons
why colon is unsupported; also, in the future locale dependent character set
validity checks will be performed.
? alias cohorts bill jkf mark kridle@ucbcory ~/cohorts.mbox
? alias mark mark@exam.ple
? set mta-aliases=/etc/aliases
alternates, unalternates
[Only new quoting rules] (alt) Manage a list of alternate addresses or names of
the active user, members of which will be removed from recipient lists (except
one). There is a set of implicit alternates which is formed of the values of
LOGNAME, from, sender and reply-to. from will not be used if sender is set. The
latter command removes the given list of alternates, the special name ‘*’ will
discard all existing alternate names.
The former command manages the error number !. It shows the current set of
alternates when used without arguments; in this mode only it also supports vput
(see Command modifiers). Otherwise the given arguments (after being checked for
validity) are appended to the list of alternate names; in posix mode they replace
that list instead.
answered, unanswered
Take a message lists and mark each message as (not) having been answered.
Messages will be marked answered when being replyd to automatically if the
markanswered variable is set. See the section Message states.
bind, unbind
[Option][Only new quoting rules] The bind command extends the MLE (see On terminal
control and line editor) with freely configurable key bindings. The latter
command removes from the given context the given key binding, both of which may be
specified as a wildcard ‘*’, so that ‘unbind * *’ will remove all bindings of all
contexts. Due to initialization order unbinding will not work for built-in key
bindings upon program startup, however: please use line-editor-no-defaults for
this purpose instead.
With zero arguments, or with a context name the former command shows all key
bindings (of the given context; an asterisk ‘*’ will iterate over all contexts); a
more verbose listing will be produced if either of debug or verbose are set. With
two or more arguments a specific binding is shown, or (re)established: the first
argument is the context to which the binding shall apply, the second argument is a
comma-separated list of the “keys” which form the binding. Further arguments will
be joined to form the expansion, and cause the binding to be created or updated.
To indicate that a binding shall not be auto-committed, but that the expansion
shall instead be furtherly editable by the user, a commercial at ‘@’ (that will be
removed) can be placed last in the expansion, from which leading and trailing
whitespace will finally be removed. Reverse solidus cannot be used as the last
character of expansion. An empty expansion will be rejected.
Contexts define when a binding applies, i.e., a binding will not be seen unless
the context for which it is defined for is currently active. This is not true for
the shared binding ‘base’, which is the foundation for all other bindings and as
such always applies, its bindings, however, only apply secondarily. The available
contexts are the shared ‘base’, the ‘default’ context which is used in all not
otherwise documented situations, and ‘compose’, which applies only to Compose
mode.
Bindings are specified as a comma-separated list of byte-sequences, where each
list entry corresponds to one “key” (press). Byte sequence boundaries will be
forcefully terminated after bind-inter-byte-timeout milliseconds, whereas key
sequences can be timed out via bind-inter-key-timeout. A list entry may,
indicated by a leading colon character ‘:’, also refer to the name of a terminal
capability; several dozen names are compiled in and may be specified either by
their terminfo(5), or, if existing, by their termcap(5) name, regardless of the
actually used [Option]al terminal control library. But any capability may be
used, as long as the name is resolvable by the [Option]al control library, or was
defined via the internal variable termcap. Input sequences are not case-
normalized, an exact match is required to update or remove a binding. It is
advisable to use an initial escape or other control character (like ‘\cA’) for
user (as opposed to purely terminal capability based) bindings in order to avoid
ambiguities; it also reduces search time. Examples:
? bind base a,b echo one
? bind base $'\E',d mle-snarf-word-fwd # Esc(ape)
? bind base $'\E',$'\c?' mle-snarf-word-bwd # Esc,Delete
? bind default $'\cA',:khome,w 'echo Editable binding@'
? bind default a,b,c rm -irf / @ # Also editable
? bind default :kf1 File %
? bind compose :kf1 ~v
Note that the entire comma-separated list is first parsed (over) as a shell-token
with whitespace as the field separator, then parsed and expanded for real with
comma as the field separator, therefore whitespace needs to be properly quoted,
see Shell-style argument quoting. Using Unicode reverse solidus escape sequences
renders a binding defunctional if the locale does not support Unicode (see
Character sets), and using terminal capabilities does so if no (corresponding)
terminal control support is (currently) available. Adding, deleting or modifying
a key binding invalidates the internal prebuilt lookup tree, it will be recreated
as necessary: this process will be visualized in most verbose as well as in debug
mode.
The following terminal capability names are built-in and can be used in
terminfo(5) or (if available) the two-letter termcap(5) notation. See the
respective manual for a list of capabilities. The program infocmp(1) can be used
to show all the capabilities of TERM or the given terminal type; using the -x flag
will also show supported (non-standard) extensions.
kbs or kb Backspace.
kdch1 or kD Delete character.
kDC or *4 — shifted variant.
kel or kE Clear to end of line.
kext or @9 Exit.
kich1 or kI Insert character.
kIC or #3 — shifted variant.
khome or kh Home.
kHOM or #2 — shifted variant.
kend or @7 End.
knp or kN Next page.
kpp or kP Previous page.
kcub1 or kl Left cursor (with more modifiers: see below).
kLFT or #4 — shifted variant.
kcuf1 or kr Right cursor (ditto).
kRIT or %i — shifted variant.
kcud1 or kd Down cursor (ditto).
kDN — shifted variant (only terminfo).
kcuu1 or ku Up cursor (ditto).
kUP — shifted variant (only terminfo).
kf0 or k0 Function key 0. Add one for each function key up to kf9 and k9,
respectively.
kf10 or k; Function key 10.
kf11 or F1 Function key 11. Add one for each function key up to kf19 and F9,
respectively.
Some terminals support key-modifier combination extensions, e.g., ‘Alt+Shift+xy’.
For example, the delete key, kdch1: in its shifted variant, the name is mutated to
kDC, then a number is appended for the states ‘Alt’ (kDC3), ‘Shift+Alt’ (kDC4),
‘Control’ (kDC5), ‘Shift+Control’ (kDC6), ‘Alt+Control’ (kDC7), finally
‘Shift+Alt+Control’ (kDC8). The same for the left cursor key, kcub1: KLFT, KLFT3,
KLFT4, KLFT5, KLFT6, KLFT7, KLFT8.
call [Only new quoting rules] Calls the given macro, which must have been created via
define (see there for more), otherwise an ^ERR-NOENT error occurs. Calling macros
recursively will at some time excess the stack size limit, causing a hard program
abortion; if recursively calling a macro is the last command of the current macro,
consider to use the command xcall, which will first release all resources of the
current macro before replacing the current macro with the called one.
call_if Identical to call if the given macro has been created via define, but does not
fail nor warn if the macro does not exist.
cd Synonym for chdir.
certsave [Option] Only applicable to S/MIME signed messages. Takes an optional message
list and a filename and saves the certificates contained within the message
signatures to the named file in both human-readable and PEM format. The
certificates can later be used to send encrypted messages to the respective
message senders by setting smime-encrypt-USER@HOST variables.
charsetalias, uncharsetalias
[Only new quoting rules] Manage alias mappings for (conversion of) Character sets.
Alias processing is not performed for INTERNAL VARIABLES, for example
charset-8bit, and mappings are ineffective if character set conversion is not
available (features does not announce ‘,+iconv,’). Expansion happens recursively
for cases where aliases point to other aliases (built-in loop limit: 8).
The latter command deletes all aliases given as arguments, or all at once when
given the asterisk ‘*’. The former shows the list of all currently defined
aliases if used without arguments, or the target of the given single argument;
when given two arguments, hyphen-minus ‘-’ being the first, the second is instead
expanded recursively. In all other cases the given arguments are treated as pairs
of character sets and their desired target alias name, creating new or updating
already existing aliases.
chdir [Only new quoting rules](ch) Change the working directory to HOME or the given
argument. Synonym for cd.
collapse, uncollapse
Only applicable to ‘thread’ed sort mode. Takes a message list and makes all
replies to these messages invisible in header summaries, except for ‘new’ messages
and the “dot”. Also when a message with collapsed replies is displayed, all of
these are automatically uncollapsed. The latter command undoes collapsing.
colour, uncolour
[Option][Only new quoting rules] Manage colour mappings of and for a Coloured
display. Without arguments the former shows all currently defined mappings.
Otherwise a colour type is expected (case-insensitively), it must be one of ‘256’
for 256-colour terminals, ‘8’, ‘ansi’ or ‘iso’ for the standard 8-colour ANSI /
ISO 6429 colour palette, and ‘1’ or ‘mono’ for monochrome terminals, which only
support (some) font attributes. Without further arguments the list of all
currently defined mappings of the given type is shown (here the special ‘all’ or
‘*’ also show all currently defined mappings).
Otherwise the second argument defines the mappable slot, the third argument a
(comma-separated list of) colour and font attribute specification(s), and the
optionally supported fourth argument can be used to specify a precondition: if
conditioned mappings exist they are tested in (creation) order unless a (case-
insensitive) match has been found, and the default mapping (if any has been
established) will only be chosen as a last resort. The types of available
preconditions depend on the mappable slot, the following of which exist:
Mappings prefixed with ‘mle-’ are used for the [Option]al built-in Mailx-Line-
Editor (MLE, see On terminal control and line editor) and do not support
preconditions.
mle-position This mapping is used for the position indicator that is visible
when a line cannot be fully displayed on the screen.
mle-prompt Used for the prompt.
mle-error Used for the occasionally appearing error indicator that is joined
onto prompt. [v15 behaviour may differ] Also used for error
messages written on standard error .
Mappings prefixed with ‘sum-’ are used in header summaries, and they all
understand the preconditions ‘dot’ (the current message) and ‘older’ for elder
messages (only honoured in conjunction with datefield-markout-older).
sum-dotmark This mapping is used for the “dotmark” that can be created with the
‘%>’ or ‘%<’ formats of the variable headline.
sum-header For the complete header summary line except the “dotmark” and the
thread structure.
sum-thread For the thread structure which can be created with the ‘%i’ format
of the variable headline.
Mappings prefixed with ‘view-’ are used when displaying messages.
view-from_ This mapping is used for so-called ‘From_’ lines, which are MBOX
file format specific header lines (also see mbox-rfc4155).
view-header For header lines. A comma-separated list of headers to which the
mapping applies may be given as a precondition; if the [Option]al
regular expression support is available then if any of the magic
regular expression characters is seen the precondition will be
evaluated as (an extended) one.
view-msginfo For the introductional message info line.
view-partinfo For MIME part info lines.
The following (case-insensitive) colour definitions and font attributes are
understood, multiple of which can be specified in a comma-separated list:
ft= a font attribute: ‘bold’, ‘reverse’ or ‘underline’. It is possible (and
often applicable) to specify multiple font attributes for a single mapping.
fg= foreground colour attribute, in order (numbers 0 - 7) ‘black’, ‘red’,
‘green’, ‘brown’, ‘blue’, ‘magenta’, ‘cyan’ or ‘white’. To specify a
256-colour mode a decimal number colour specification in the range 0 to 255,
inclusive, is supported, and interpreted as follows:
0 - 7 the standard ISO 6429 colours, as above.
8 - 15 high intensity variants of the standard colours.
16 - 231 216 colours in tuples of 6.
232 - 255 grayscale from black to white in 24 steps.
#!/bin/sh -
fg() { printf "\033[38;5;${1}m($1)"; }
bg() { printf "\033[48;5;${1}m($1)"; }
i=0
while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do fg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
printf "\033[0m\n"
i=0
while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do bg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
printf "\033[0m\n"
bg= background colour attribute (see fg= for possible values).
The command uncolour will remove for the given colour type (the special type ‘*’
selects all) the given mapping; if the optional precondition argument is given
only the exact tuple of mapping and precondition is removed. The special name ‘*’
will remove all mappings (no precondition allowed), thus ‘uncolour * *’ will
remove all established mappings.
commandalias, uncommandalias
[Only new quoting rules] Define or list, and remove, respectively, command
aliases. An (command)alias can be used everywhere a normal command can be used,
but always takes precedence: any arguments that are given to the command alias are
joined onto the alias expansion, and the resulting string forms the command line
that is, in effect, executed. The latter command removes all given aliases, the
special name asterisk ‘*’ will remove all existing aliases. When used without
arguments the former shows a list of all currently known aliases, with one
argument only the expansion of the given one.
With two or more arguments a command alias is defined or updated: the first
argument is the name under which the remaining command line should be accessible,
the content of which can be just about anything. An alias may itself expand to
another alias, but to avoid expansion loops further expansion will be prevented if
an alias refers to itself or if an expansion depth limit is reached. Explicit
expansion prevention is available via reverse solidus \, one of the Command
modifiers.
? commandalias xx
s-nail: `commandalias': no such alias: xx
? commandalias xx echo hello,
? commandalias xx
commandalias xx 'echo hello,'
? xx
hello,
? xx world
hello, world
Copy (C) Similar to copy, but copy the messages to a file named after the local part of
the sender of the first message instead of taking a filename argument; outfolder
is inspected to decide on the actual storage location.
copy (c) Copy messages to the named file and do not mark them as being saved; otherwise
identical to save.
csop [Only new quoting rules] A multiplexer command which provides C-style string
operations on 8-bit bytes without a notion of locale settings and character sets,
effectively assuming ASCII data. For numeric and other operations refer to vexpr.
vput, one of the Command modifiers, is supported. The error result is ‘-1’ for
usage errors and numeric results, the empty string otherwise; missing data errors,
as for unsuccessful searches, result in the ! error number being set to
^ERR-NODATA. Where the question mark ‘?’ modifier suffix is supported, a case-
insensitive (ASCII mapping) operation mode is supported; the keyword ‘case’ is
optional so that ‘find?’ and ‘find?case’ are identical.
length Queries the length of the given argument.
hash, hash32 Calculates a hash value of the given argument. The latter will
return a 32-bit result regardless of host environment. ‘?’ modifier
suffix is supported. These use Chris Torek's hash algorithm, the
resulting hash value is bit mixed as shown by Bret Mulvey.
find Search for the second in the first argument. Shows the resulting
0-based offset shall it have been found. ‘?’ modifier suffix is
supported.
substring Creates a substring of its first argument. The optional second argument
is the 0-based starting offset, a negative one counts from the end; the
optional third argument specifies the length of the desired result, a
negative length leaves off the given number of bytes at the end of the
original string; by default the entire string is used. This operation
tries to work around faulty arguments (set verbose for error logs), but
reports them via the error number ! as ^ERR-OVERFLOW.
trim Trim away whitespace characters from both ends of the argument.
trim-front Trim away whitespace characters from the begin of the argument.
trim-end Trim away whitespace characters from the end of the argument.
cwd Show the name of the current working directory, as reported by getcwd(3).
Supports vput (see Command modifiers). The return status is tracked via ?.
Decrypt [Option] For unencrypted messages this command is identical to Copy; Encrypted
messages are first decrypted, if possible, and then copied.
decrypt [Option] For unencrypted messages this command is identical to copy; Encrypted
messages are first decrypted, if possible, and then copied.
define, undefine
The latter command deletes the given macro, the special name ‘*’ will discard all
existing macros. Deletion of (a) macro(s) can be performed from within running
(a) macro(s), including self-deletion. Without arguments the former command
prints the current list of macros, including their content, otherwise it defines a
macro, replacing an existing one of the same name as applicable.
A defined macro can be invoked explicitly by using the call, call_if and xcall
commands, or implicitly if a macro hook is triggered, for example a folder-hook.
Execution of a macro body can be stopped from within by calling return.
Temporary macro block-scope variables can be created or deleted with the local
command modifier in conjunction with the commands set and unset, respectively. To
enforce unrolling of changes made to (global) INTERNAL VARIABLES the command
localopts can be used instead; its covered scope depends on how (i.e., “as what”:
normal macro, folder hook, hook, account switch) the macro is invoked.
Inside a called macro, the given positional parameters are implicitly local to the
macro's scope, and may be accessed via the variables *, @, # and 1 and any other
positive unsigned decimal number less than or equal to #. Positional parameters
can be shifted, or become completely replaced, removed etc. via vpospar. A
helpful command for numeric computation and string evaluations is vexpr, csop
offers C-style byte string operations.
define name {
command1
command2
...
commandN
}
define exmac {
echo Parameter 1 of ${#} is ${1}, all: ${*} / ${@}
return 1000 0
}
call exmac Hello macro exmac!
echo ${?}/${!}/${^ERRNAME}
delete, undelete
(d, u) Marks the given message list as being or not being ‘deleted’, respectively;
if no argument has been specified then the usual search for a visible message is
performed, as documented for Message list arguments, showing only the next input
prompt if the search fails. Deleted messages will neither be saved in the
secondary mailbox MBOX nor will they be available for most other commands. If the
autoprint variable is set, the new “dot” or the last message restored,
respectively, is automatically typed; also see dp, dt.
digmsg [Only new quoting rules] Digging (information out of) messages is possible through
digmsg objects, which can be created for the given message number; in Compose mode
the hyphen-minus ‘-’ will instead open the message that is being composed. If a
hyphen-minus is given as the optional third argument then output will be generated
on the standard output channel instead of being subject to consumption by the
readall (or read and readsh) command(s). Note: output must be consumed before
normal processing can continue; for digmsg objects this means each command output
has to be read until the end of file (EOF) state occurs.
The objects may be removed again by giving the same identifier used for creation;
this step could be omitted: objects will be automatically closed when the active
folder (mailbox) or the compose mode is left, respectively. In all other use
cases the second argument is an object identifier, and the third and all following
arguments are interpreted as via ~^ (see COMMAND ESCAPES):
? vput = msgno; digmsg create $msgno
? digmsg $msgno header list; readall x; echon $x
210 Subject From To Message-ID References In-Reply-To
? digmsg $msgno header show Subject;readall x;echon $x
212 Subject
'Hello, world'
? digmsg remove $msgno
discard (di) Identical to ignore. Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
dp, dt Delete the given messages and automatically type the new “dot” if one exists,
regardless of the setting of autoprint.
dotmove Move the “dot” up or down by one message when given ‘+’ or ‘-’ argument,
respectively.
draft, undraft
Take message lists and mark each given message as being draft, or not being draft,
respectively, as documented in the section Message states.
echo [Only new quoting rules](ec) Print the given strings, equivalent to the shell
utility echo(1), that is, Shell-style argument quoting expansion is performed and,
different to the otherwise identical echon, a trailing newline is echoed. vput as
documented in Command modifiers is supported, and the error number ! is managed:
if data is stored in a variable then the return value reflects the length of the
result string in case of success and is ‘-1’ on error.
Remarks: this command traditionally (in BSD Mail) also performed Filename
transformations, which is standard incompatible and hard to handle because quoting
transformation patterns is not possible; the subcommand file-expand of vexpr can
be used to expand filenames.
echoerr [Only new quoting rules] Identical to echo, but the message is written to standard
error, and prefixed by log-prefix. Also see echoerrn. In interactive sessions
the [Option]al message ring queue for errors will be used instead, if available
and vput was not used.
echon [Only new quoting rules] Identical to echo, but does not write or store a trailing
newline.
echoerrn [Only new quoting rules] Identical to echoerr, but does not write or store a
trailing newline.
edit (e) Point the text EDITOR at each message from the given list in turn. Modified
contents are discarded unless the writebackedited variable is set, and are not
used unless the mailbox can be written to and the editor returns a successful exit
status. visual can be used instead for a more display oriented editor.
elif Part of the if (see there for more), elif, else, endif conditional — if the
condition of a preceding if was false, check the following condition and execute
the following block if it evaluates true.
else (el) Part of the if (see there for more), elif, else, endif conditional — if none
of the conditions of the preceding if and elif commands was true, the else block
is executed.
endif (en) Marks the end of an if (see there for more), elif, else, endif conditional
execution block.
environ [Only new quoting rules] There is a strict separation in between INTERNAL
VARIABLES and the program ENVIRONMENT, which is inherited by child processes.
Some variables of the latter are however vivid for program operation, their
purpose is known, therefore they have been integrated transparently into handling
of the former, as accessible via set and unset. To integrate any other
environment variable, and/or to export internal variables into the process
environment where they normally are not, a link needs to become established with
this command, for example
environ link PERL5LIB TZ
Afterwards changing such variables with set will cause automatic updates of the
environment, too. Sufficient system support provided (it was in BSD as early as
1987, and is standardized since Y2K) removing such variables with unset will
remove them also from the environment, but in any way the knowledge they ever have
been linked will be lost. This implies that localopts may cause loss of such
links.
The subcommand unlink removes an existing link without otherwise touching
variables, the set and unset subcommands are identical to set and unset, but
additionally update the program environment accordingly; removing a variable
breaks any freely established link.
errors [Option] As console user interfaces at times scroll error messages by too fast
and/or out of scope, data can additionally be sent to an error queue manageable by
this command: show or no argument will display and clear the queue, clear will
only clear it. As the queue becomes filled with errors-limit entries the eldest
entries are being dropped. There are also the variables ^ERRQUEUE-COUNT and
^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS.
eval [Only new quoting rules] Construct a command by concatenating the arguments,
separated with a single space character, and then evaluate the result. This
command passes through the exit status ? and error number ! of the evaluated
command; also see call.
define xxx {
echo "xxx arg <$1>"
shift
if $# -gt 0
\xcall xxx "$@"
endif
}
define yyy {
eval "$@ ' ball"
}
call yyy '\call xxx' "b\$'\t'u ' "
call xxx arg <b u>
call xxx arg < >
call xxx arg <ball>
exit (ex or x) Exit from S-nail without changing the active mailbox and skip any saving
of messages in the secondary mailbox MBOX, as well as a possibly tracked line
editor history-file. A possibly set on-account-cleanup will be invoked, however.
The optional status number argument will be passed through to exit(3). [v15
behaviour may differ] For now it can happen that the given status will be
overwritten, later this will only occur if a later error needs to be reported onto
an otherwise success indicating status.
File (Fi) Like folder, but open the mailbox read-only.
file (fi) See folder.
filetype, unfiletype
[Only new quoting rules] Define, list, and remove, respectively, file handler
hooks, which provide (shell) commands that enable S-nail to load and save MBOX
files from and to files with the registered file extensions, as shown and
described for folder. The extensions are used case-insensitively, yet the auto-
completion feature of for example folder will only work case-sensitively. An
intermediate temporary file will be used to store the expanded data. The latter
command will remove hooks for all given extensions, asterisk ‘*’ will remove all
existing handlers.
When used without arguments the former shows a list of all currently defined file
hooks, with one argument the expansion of the given alias. Otherwise three
arguments are expected, the first specifying the file extension for which the hook
is meant, and the second and third defining the load- and save commands to deal
with the file type, respectively, both of which must read from standard input and
write to standard output. Changing hooks will not affect already opened mailboxes
([v15 behaviour may differ] except below). [v15 behaviour may differ] For now too
much work is done, and files are oftened read in twice where once would be
sufficient: this can cause problems if a filetype is changed while such a file is
opened; this was already so with the built-in support of .gz etc. in Heirloom, and
will vanish in v15. [v15 behaviour may differ] For now all handler strings are
passed to the SHELL for evaluation purposes; in the future a ‘!’ prefix to load
and save commands may mean to bypass this shell instance: placing a leading space
will avoid any possible misinterpretations.
? filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
? set record=+sent.zst.pgp
flag, unflag
Take message lists and mark the messages as being flagged, or not being flagged,
respectively, for urgent/special attention. See the section Message states.
Folder (Fold) Like folder, but open the mailbox read-only.
folder (fold) Open a new, or show status information of the current mailbox. If an
argument is given, changes (such as deletions) will be written out, a new mailbox
will be opened, the internal variables mailbox-resolved and mailbox-display will
be updated, a set according folder-hook is executed, and optionally a summary of
headers is displayed if the variable header is set.
Filename transformations will be applied to the name argument, and ‘protocol://’
prefixes are, i.e., URL (see On URL syntax and credential lookup) syntax is
understood, as in ‘mbox:///tmp/somefolder’. If a protocol prefix is used the
mailbox type is fixated, otherwise opening none-existing folders uses the protocol
defined in newfolders.
For the protocols mbox and file (MBOX database), as well as eml (electronic mail
message [v15 behaviour may differ] read-only) the list of all registered filetypes
is traversed to check whether hooks shall be used to load (and save) data from
(and to) the given name. Changing hooks will not affect already opened mailboxes.
For example, the following creates hooks for the gzip(1) compression tool and a
combined compressed and encrypted format:
? filetype \
gzip 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
For historic reasons filetypes provide limited (case-sensitive) auto-completion
capabilities. For example ‘mbox.gz’ will be found for ‘? file mbox’, provided
that corresponding handlers are installed. It will neither find ‘mbox.GZ’ nor
‘mbox.Gz’ however, but an explicit ‘? file mbox.GZ’ will find and use the handler
for ‘gz’. [v15 behaviour may differ] The latter mode can only be used for MBOX
files.
EML files consist of only one mail message, [v15 behaviour may differ] and can
only be opened read-only. When reading MBOX files tolerant POSIX rules are used
by default. Invalid message boundaries that can be found quite often in historic
MBOX files will be complained about (even more with debug): in this case the
method described for mbox-rfc4155 can be used to create a valid MBOX database from
the invalid input.
MBOX databases and EML files will always be protected via file-region locks
(fcntl(2)) during file operations to protect against concurrent modifications.
[Option] An MBOX inbox (MAIL) or primary system mailbox will also be protected by
so-called dotlock files, the traditional way of mail spool file locking: for any
file ‘x’ a lock file ‘x.lock’ will be created during the synchronization, in the
same directory and with the same user and group identities as the file of interest
— as necessary created by an external privileged dotlock helper. dotlock-disable
disables dotlock files. Also see FAQ: Howto handle stale dotlock files.
[Option] If no protocol has been fixated, and name refers to a directory with the
subdirectories ‘tmp’, ‘new’ and ‘cur’, then it is treated as a folder in “Maildir”
format. The maildir format stores each message in its own file, and has been
designed so that file locking is not necessary when reading or writing files.
[Option]ally URLs can be used to access network resources, securely via Encrypted
network communication, if so supported. Network communication socket timeouts are
configurable via socket-connect-timeout. All network traffic may be proxied over
a SOCKS server via socks-proxy.
[v15-compat] protocol://[user[:password]@]host[:port][/path]
[no v15-compat] protocol://[user@]host[:port][/path]
[Option]ally supported network protocols are pop3 (POP3) and pop3s (POP3 with TLS
encrypted transport), imap and imaps. The [/path] part is valid only for IMAP;
there it defaults to INBOX. Network URLs require a special encoding as documented
in the section On URL syntax and credential lookup.
folders Lists the names of all folders below the given argument or folder. For file-based
protocols LISTER will be used for display purposes.
Followup, followup
(Compose mode)(F,fo) Similar to Reply, and reply, respectively, but save the
message in a file named after the local part of the (first) recipient's address,
possibly overwriting record, and honouring outfolder. Also see Copy and Save.
Forward (Compose mode) Similar to forward, but saves the message in a file named after the
local part of the recipient's address (instead of in record).
forward (Compose mode) Take a message list and the address of a recipient, subject to
fullnames, to whom the messages are sent. The text of the original message is
included in the new one, enclosed by the values of forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. content-description-forwarded-message is inspected. The
list of included headers can be filtered with the ‘forward’ slot of the white- and
blacklisting command headerpick. Only the first part of a multipart message is
included but for forward-as-attachment.
This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,
or was rejected by expandaddr policy, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP
if a necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of Specifying messages. Any error stops processing
of further messages.
from (f) Takes a list of message specifications and displays a summary of their message
headers, exactly as via headers, making the first message of the result the new
“dot” (the last message if showlast is set). An alias of this command is search.
Also see Specifying messages.
Fwd [Obsolete] Alias for Forward.
fwd [Obsolete] Alias for forward.
fwdignore
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
fwdretain
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
ghost, unghost
[Obsolete] Replaced by commandalias, uncommandalias.
headerpick, unheaderpick
[Only new quoting rules] Multiplexer command to manage white- and blacklisting
selections of header fields for a variety of applications. Without arguments the
set of contexts that have settings is displayed. When given arguments, the first
argument is the context to which the command applies, one of (case-insensitive)
‘type’ for display purposes (for example type), ‘save’ for selecting which headers
shall be stored persistently when save, copy, move or even decrypting messages
(note that MIME related etc. header fields should not be ignored in order to not
destroy usability of the message in this case), ‘forward’ for stripping down
messages when forwarding message (has no effect if forward-as-attachment is set),
and ‘top’ for defining user-defined set of fields for the command top.
The current settings of the given context are displayed if it is the only
argument. A second argument denotes the type of restriction that is to be chosen,
it may be (a case-insensitive prefix of) ‘retain’ or ‘ignore’ for white- and
blacklisting purposes, respectively. Establishing a whitelist suppresses
inspection of the corresponding blacklist.
If no further argument is given the current settings of the given type will be
displayed, otherwise the remaining arguments specify header fields, which
[Option]ally may be given as regular expressions, to be added to the given type.
The special wildcard field (asterisk, ‘*’) will establish a (fast) shorthand
setting which covers all fields.
The latter command always takes three or more arguments and can be used to remove
selections, i.e., from the given context, the given type of list, all the given
headers will be removed, the special argument ‘*’ will remove all headers.
headers (h) Show the current group of headers, the size of which depends on the variable
screen in interactive mode, and the format of which can be defined with headline.
If a message-specification is given the group of headers containing the first
message therein is shown and the message at the top of the screen becomes the new
“dot”; the last message is targeted if showlast is set.
help (hel) A synonym for ?.
history [Option] Without arguments or when given show all history entries are shown (this
mode also supports a more verbose output). load will replace the list of entries
with the content of history-file, and save will dump all entries to said file,
replacing former content, and clear will delete all entries. The argument can
also be a signed decimal NUMBER, which will select and evaluate the respective
history entry, and move it to the top of the history; a negative number is used as
an offset to the current command so that ‘-1’ will select the last command, the
history top, whereas delete will delete all given entries (:NUMBER:). Also see On
terminal control and line editor.
hold (ho, also preserve) Takes a message list and marks each message therein to be
saved in the user's system inbox instead of in the secondary mailbox MBOX. Does
not override the delete command. S-nail deviates from the POSIX standard with
this command, because a next command issued after hold will display the following
message, not the current one.
if (i) Part of the if, elif, else, endif conditional execution construct — if the
given condition is true then the encapsulated block is executed. The POSIX
standard only supports the (case-insensitive) conditions ‘r’eceive and ‘s’end, the
remaining are non-portable extensions. [v15 behaviour may differ] In conjunction
with the wysh command prefix(es) Shell-style argument quoting and more test
operators are available.
if receive
commands ...
else
commands ...
endif
Further (case-insensitive) one-argument conditions are ‘t’erminal which evaluates
to true in interactive terminal sessions (running with standard input or standard
output attached to a terminal, and none of the “quickrun” command line options -e,
-H and -L have been used), as well as any boolean value (see INTERNAL VARIABLES
for textual boolean representations) to mark an enwrapped block as “never execute”
or “always execute”. (Remarks: condition syntax errors skip all branches until
endif.)
[no v15-compat] and without wysh: It is possible to check INTERNAL VARIABLES as
well as ENVIRONMENT variables for existence or compare their expansion against a
user given value or another variable by using the ‘$’ (“variable next”)
conditional trigger character; a variable on the right hand side may be signalled
using the same mechanism. Variable names may be enclosed in a pair of matching
braces. When this mode has been triggered, several operators are available
([v15-compat] and wysh: they are always available, and there is no trigger:
variables will have been expanded by the shell-compatible parser before the if
etc. command sees them).
[v15-compat] Two argument conditions. Variables can be tested for existence and
expansion: ‘-N’ will test whether the given variable exists, so that ‘-N
editalong’ will evaluate to true when editalong is set, whereas ‘-Z editalong’
will if it is not. ‘-n "$editalong"’ will be true if the variable is set and
expands to a non-empty string, ‘-z $'\$editalong'’ only if the expansion is empty,
whether the variable exists or not. The remaining conditions take three
arguments.
Integer operators treat the arguments on the left and right hand side of the
operator as integral numbers and compare them arithmetically. It is an error if
any of the operands is not a valid integer, an empty argument (which implies it
had been quoted) is treated as if it were 0. Via the question mark ‘?’ modifier
suffix a saturated operation mode is available where numbers will linger at the
minimum or maximum possible value, instead of overflowing (or trapping), the
keyword ‘saturated’ is optional, ‘==?’, ‘==?satu’ and ‘==?saturated’ are therefore
identical. Available operators are ‘-lt’ (less than), ‘-le’ (less than or equal
to), ‘-eq’ (equal), ‘-ne’ (not equal), ‘-ge’ (greater than or equal to), and ‘-gt’
(greater than).
String and regular expression data operators compare the left and right hand side
according to their textual content. Unset variables are treated as the empty
string. Via the question mark ‘?’ modifier suffix a case-insensitive operation
mode is available, the keyword ‘case’ is optional, ‘==?’ and ‘==?case’ are
identical.
Available string operators are ‘<’ (less than), ‘<=’ (less than or equal to), ‘==’
(equal), ‘!=’ (not equal), ‘>=’ (greater than or equal to), ‘>’ (greater than),
‘=%’ (is substring of) and ‘!%’ (is not substring of). By default these operators
work on bytes and (therefore) do not take into account character set specifics.
If the case-insensitivity modifier has been used, case is ignored according to the
rules of the US-ASCII encoding, i.e., bytes are still compared.
When the [Option]al regular expression support is available, the additional string
operators ‘=~’ and ‘!~’ can be used. They treat the right hand side as an
extended regular expression that is matched according to the active locale (see
Character sets), i.e., character sets should be honoured correctly.
Conditions can be joined via AND-OR lists (where the AND operator is ‘&&’ and the
OR operator is ‘||’), which have equal precedence and will be evaluated with left
associativity, thus using the same syntax that is known for the sh(1). It is also
possible to form groups of conditions and lists by enclosing them in pairs of
brackets ‘[ ... ]’, which may be interlocked within each other, and also be joined
via AND-OR lists.
The results of individual conditions and entire groups may be modified via unary
operators: the unary operator ‘!’ will reverse the result.
wysh set v15-compat=yes # with value: automatic "wysh"!
if -N debug;echo *debug* set;else;echo not;endif
if "$ttycharset" == UTF-8 || "$ttycharset" ==?cas UTF8
echo ttycharset is UTF-8, the former case-sensitive!
endif
set t1=one t2=one
if [ "${t1}" == "${t2}" ]
echo These two variables are equal
endif
if "$features" =% ,+regex, && "$TERM" =~?case ^xterm.*
echo ..in an X terminal
endif
if [ [ true ] && [ [ "${debug}" != '' ] || \
[ "$verbose" != '' ] ] ]
echo Noisy, noisy
endif
if true && [ -n "$debug" || -n "${verbose}" ]
echo Left associativity, as is known from the shell
endif
ignore (ig) Identical to discard. Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
list Shows the names of all available commands, in command lookup order. [Option] In
conjunction with a set variable verbose additional information will be provided
for each command: the argument type will be indicated, the documentation string
will be shown, and the set of command flags will show up:
‘`local'’ command supports the command modifier local.
‘`vput'’ command supports the command modifier vput.
‘*!*’ the error number is tracked in !.
‘needs-box’ whether the command needs an active mailbox, a folder.
‘ok:’ indicators whether command is ...
‘batch/interactive’
usable in interactive or batch mode (-#).
‘send-mode’ usable in send mode.
‘subprocess’ allowed to be used when running in a subprocess
instance, for example from within a macro that is
called via on-compose-splice.
‘not ok:’ indicators whether command is not ...
‘compose mode’ available in Compose mode.
‘startup’ available during program startup, like in Resource
files.
‘gabby’ The command produces history-gabby history entries.
localopts
Enforce change localization of environ (linked) ENVIRONMENT as well as (global)
INTERNAL VARIABLES, meaning that their state will be reverted to the former one
once the “covered scope” is left. Just like the command modifier local, which
provides block-scope localization for some commands (instead), it can only be used
inside of macro definition blocks introduced by account or define. The covered
scope of an account is left once a different account is activated, and some
macros, notably folder-hooks, use their own specific notion of covered scope, here
it will be extended until the folder is left again.
This setting stacks up: i.e., if ‘macro1’ enables change localization and calls
‘macro2’, which explicitly resets localization, then any value changes within
‘macro2’ will still be reverted when the scope of ‘macro1’ is left. (Caveats: if
in this example ‘macro2’ changes to a different account which sets some variables
that are already covered by localizations, their scope will be extended, and in
fact leaving the account will (thus) restore settings in (likely) global scope
which actually were defined in a local, macro private context!)
This command takes one or two arguments, the optional first one specifies an
attribute that may be one of scope, which refers to the current scope and is thus
the default, call, which causes any macro that is being called to be started with
localization enabled by default, as well as call-fixate, which (if enabled)
disallows any called macro to turn off localization: like this it can be ensured
that once the current scope regains control, any changes made in deeper levels
have been reverted. The latter two are mutually exclusive, and neither affects
xcall. The (second) argument is interpreted as a boolean (string, see INTERNAL
VARIABLES) and states whether the given attribute shall be turned on or off.
define temporary_settings {
set possibly_global_option1
localopts on
set localized_option1
set localized_option2
localopts scope off
set possibly_global_option2
}
Lfollowup, Lreply
(Compose mode) Reply to messages that come in via known (mlist) or subscribed
(mlsubscribe) mailing lists, or pretend to do so (see Mailing lists): on top of
the usual followup and reply, respectively, functionality this will actively
resort and even remove message recipients in order to generate a message that is
supposed to be sent to a mailing list. For example it will also implicitly
generate a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header if that seems useful, regardless of the
setting of the variable followup-to. For more documentation please refer to On
sending mail, and non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,
^ERR-PERM if some addressees where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error
occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL
for other errors. It can also fail with errors of Specifying messages.
Occurrence of some of the errors depend on the value of expandaddr. Any error
stops processing of further messages.
Mail (Compose mode) Similar to mail, but saves the message in a file named after the
local part of the first recipient's address (instead of in record).
mail (Compose mode)(m) Takes a (list of) recipient address(es) as (an) argument(s), or
asks on standard input if none were given; then collects the remaining mail
content and sends it out. Unless the internal variable fullnames is set recipient
addresses will be stripped from comments, names etc. For more documentation
please refer to On sending mail, and non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,
^ERR-PERM if some addressees where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NOTSUP if multiple
messages have been specified, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP if a
necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors. It can
also fail with errors of Specifying messages. Occurrence of some of the errors
depend on the value of expandaddr.
mailcap [Option] When used without arguments or if show has been given the content of The
Mailcap files cache is shown, (re-)initializing it first (as necessary. If the
argument is load then the cache will only be (re-)initialized, and clear will
remove its contents. Note that S-nail will try to load the files only once, use
‘mailcap clear’ to unlock further attempts. Loading and parsing can be made more
verbose.
mbox (mb) The given message list is to be sent to the secondary mailbox MBOX when
S-nail is quit; this is the default action unless the variable hold is set. [v15
behaviour may differ] This command can only be used in a primary system mailbox.
mimetype, unmimetype
[Only new quoting rules] Without arguments the content of the MIME type cache will
displayed; a more verbose listing will be produced if either of debug or verbose
are set. When given arguments they will be joined, interpreted as shown in The
mime.types files (also see HTML mail and MIME attachments), and the resulting
entry will be added (prepended) to the cache. In any event MIME type sources are
loaded first as necessary – mimetypes-load-control can be used to fine-tune which
sources are actually loaded.
The latter command deletes all specifications of the given MIME type, thus ‘?
unmimetype text/plain’ will remove all registered specifications for the MIME type
‘text/plain’. The special name ‘*’ will discard all existing MIME types, just as
will ‘reset’, but which also reenables cache initialization via
mimetypes-load-control.
mimeview [v15 behaviour may differ] Only available in interactive mode, this command allows
execution of external MIME type handlers which do not integrate into the normal
type output (see HTML mail and MIME attachments). ([v15 behaviour may differ] No
syntax to directly address parts, this restriction may vanish.) The user will be
asked for each non-text part of the given message in turn whether the registered
handler shall be used to display the part.
mlist, unmlist
[Only new quoting rules] Manage the list of known Mailing lists; subscriptions are
controlled via mlsubscribe. The latter command deletes all given arguments, or
all at once when given the asterisk ‘*’. The former shows the list of all
currently known lists if used without arguments, otherwise the given arguments
will become known. [Option] In the latter case, arguments which contain any of
the magic regular expression characters will be interpreted as one, possibly
matching many addresses; these will be sequentially matched via linked lists
instead of being looked up in a dictionary.
mlsubscribe, unmlsubscribe
Building upon the command pair mlist, unmlist, but only managing the subscription
attribute of mailing lists. (The former will also create not yet existing mailing
lists.)
Move Similar to move, but move the messages to a file named after the local part of the
sender of the first message instead of taking a filename argument; outfolder is
inspected to decide on the actual storage location.
move Acts like copy but marks the messages for deletion if they were transferred
successfully.
More Like more, but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick
selection, and all MIME parts. Identical to Page.
more Invokes the PAGER on the given messages, even in non-interactive mode and as long
as the standard output is a terminal. Identical to page.
mtaaliases
[Option] When used without arguments or if show has been given the content of the
mta-aliases cache is shown, (re-)initializing it first (as necessary). If the
argument is load then the cache will only be (re-)initialized, and clear will
remove its contents.
netrc [Option] When used without arguments, or when the argument was show the content of
the ~/.netrc cache is shown, initializing it as necessary. If the argument is
load then the cache will be (re)loaded, whereas clear removes it. Loading and
parsing can be made more verbose. lookup will query the cache for the URL given
as the second argument (‘[USER@]HOST’). See netrc-lookup, netrc-pipe and the
section On URL syntax and credential lookup; the section The .netrc file documents
the file format in detail.
newmail Checks for new mail in the current folder without committing any changes before.
If new mail is present, a message is shown. If the header variable is set, the
headers of each new message are also shown. This command is not available for all
mailbox types.
next (n) (like ‘+’ or “ENTER”) Goes to the next message in sequence and types it. With
an argument list, types the next matching message.
New Same as Unread.
new Same as unread.
noop If the current folder is accessed via a network connection, a “NOOP” command is
sent, otherwise no operation is performed.
Page Like page, but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick
selection, and all MIME parts. Identical to More.
page Invokes the PAGER on the given messages, even in non-interactive mode and as long
as the standard output is a terminal. Identical to more.
Pipe Like pipe but also pipes header fields which would not pass the headerpick
selection, and all parts of MIME ‘multipart/alternative’ messages.
pipe (pi) Takes an optional message list and shell command (that defaults to cmd), and
pipes the messages through the command. If the page variable is set, every
message is followed by a formfeed character.
preserve (pre) A synonym for hold.
Print (P) Alias for Type.
print (p) Research UNIX equivalent of type.
quit (q) Terminates the session, saving all undeleted, unsaved messages in the current
secondary mailbox MBOX, preserving all messages marked with hold or preserve or
never referenced in the system inbox, and removing all other messages from the
primary system mailbox. If new mail has arrived during the session, the message
“You have new mail” will be shown. If given while editing a mailbox file with the
command line option -f, then the edit file is rewritten. A return to the shell is
effected, unless the rewrite of edit file fails, in which case the user can escape
with the exit command. The optional status number argument will be passed through
to exit(3). [v15 behaviour may differ] For now it can happen that the given
status will be overwritten, later this will only occur if a later error needs to
be reported onto an otherwise success indicating status.
read [Only new quoting rules] Read a line from standard input, or the channel set
active via readctl, and assign the data, which will be split as indicated by ifs,
to the given variables. The variable names are checked by the same rules as
documented for vput, and the same error codes will be seen in !; the exit status ?
indicates the number of bytes read, it will be ‘-1’ with the error number ! set to
^ERR-BADF in case of I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE upon End-Of-File. If there are more
fields than variables, assigns successive fields to the last given variable. If
there are less fields than variables, assigns the empty string to the remains.
? read a b c
H e l l o
? echo "<$a> <$b> <$c>"
<H> <e> <l l o>
? wysh set ifs=:; read a b c;unset ifs
hey2.0,:"'you ",:world!:mars.:
? echo $?/$^ERRNAME / <$a><$b><$c>
0/NONE / <hey2.0,><"'you ",><world!:mars.:><><>
readsh [Only new quoting rules] Like read, but splits on shell token boundaries (see
Shell-style argument quoting) rather than at ifs. [v15 behaviour may differ]
Could become a commandalias, maybe ‘read --tokenize --’.
readall [Only new quoting rules] Read anything from standard input, or the channel set
active via readctl, and assign the data to the given variable. The variable name
is checked by the same rules as documented for vput, and the same error codes will
be seen in !; the exit status ? indicates the number of bytes read, it will be
‘-1’ with the error number ! set to ^ERR-BADF in case of I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE
upon End-Of-File. [v15 behaviour may differ] The input data length is restricted
to 31-bits.
readctl [Only new quoting rules] Manages input channels for read, readsh and readall, to
be used to avoid complicated or impracticable code, like calling read from within
a macro in non-interactive mode. Without arguments, or when the first argument is
show, a listing of all known channels is printed. Channels can otherwise be
created, and existing channels can be set active and removed by giving the string
used for creation.
The channel name is expected to be a file descriptor number, or, if parsing the
numeric fails, an input file name that undergoes Filename transformations. For
example (this example requires a modern shell):
$ printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\nyou\necho $a' |\
s-nail -R#
hey, you
$ LC_ALL=C printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\necho $a' |\
LC_ALL=C 6<<< 'you' s-nail -R#X'readctl create 6'
hey, you
remove [Only new quoting rules] Removes the named files or directories. If a name refers
to a mailbox, say a Maildir mailbox, then a mailbox type specific removal will be
performed, deleting the complete mailbox. In interactive mode the user is asked
for confirmation.
rename [Only new quoting rules] Takes the name of an existing folder and the name for the
new folder and renames the first to the second one. Filename transformations
including shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions (glob(7)) are performed on
both arguments. Both folders must be of the same type.
Reply, Respond
(Compose mode)(R) Identical to reply except that it replies to only the sender of
each message of the given list, by using the first message as the template to
quote, for the ‘Subject:’ etc.; setting flipr will exchange this command with
reply.
reply, respond
(Compose mode)(r) Take a message (list) and group-respond (to each in turn) by
addressing the sender and all recipients, subject to fullnames and alternates
processing. followup-to, followup-to-honour, reply-to-honour as well as
recipients-in-cc influence response behaviour. quote as well as
quote-as-attachment configure whether responded-to message shall be quoted etc.,
content-description-quote-attachment may be used. Setting flipr will exchange
this command with Reply. The command Lreply offers special support for replying
to mailing lists. For more documentation please refer to On sending mail, and
non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,
or was rejected by expandaddr policy, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP
if a necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of Specifying messages. Any error stops processing
of further messages.
Resend Like resend, but does not add any header lines. This is not a way to hide the
sender's identity, but useful for sending a message again to the same recipients.
resend Takes a list of messages and a name, and sends each message to the given
addressee, which is subject to fullnames. ‘Resent-From:’ and related header
fields are prepended to the new copy of the message. Saving in record is only
performed if record-resent is set. [v15 behaviour may differ](Compose mode) is
not entered, the only supported hooks are on-resend-enter and on-resend-cleanup.
This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,
or was rejected by expandaddr policy, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP
if a necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of Specifying messages. Any error stops processing
of further messages.
retain (ret) Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
return Only available inside of a defined macro or an account, this command returns
control of execution to the outer scope. The two optional parameters are positive
decimal numbers and default to 0: the first specifies the 32-bit return value
(stored in ? [v15 behaviour may differ] and later extended to 64-bit), the second
the 32-bit error number (stored in !). As documented for ? a non-0 exit status
may cause the program to exit.
Save (S) Similar to save, but saves the messages in a file named after the local part
of the sender of the first message instead of taking a filename argument;
outfolder is inspected to decide on the actual storage location.
save (s) Takes a message list and a filename and appends each message in turn to the
end of the file. Filename transformations including shell pathname wildcard
pattern expansions (glob(7)) is performed on the filename. If no filename is
given, the secondary mailbox MBOX is used. The filename in quotes, followed by
the generated character count is echoed on the user's terminal. If editing a
primary system mailbox the messages are marked for deletion. To filter the saved
header fields to the desired subset use the ‘save’ slot of the white- and
blacklisting command headerpick. Also see Copy.
savediscard
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
saveignore
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
saveretain
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
search Takes a message specification (list) and displays a header summary of all matching
messages, as via headers. This command is an alias of from. Also see Specifying
messages.
seen Takes a message list and marks all messages as having been read.
set, unset
(se, [Only new quoting rules] uns) The latter command will delete all given global
variables, or only block-scope local ones if the local command modifier has been
used. The former, when used without arguments, will show all currently known
variables, being more verbose if either of debug or verbose is set. Remarks: this
list mode will not automatically link-in (known) ENVIRONMENT variables, this only
happens for explicit addressing, examples are varshow, using a variable in an if
condition or a string passed to echo, explicit setting, as well as some program-
internal use cases (look-ups).
Otherwise the given variables (and arguments) are set or adjusted. Arguments are
of the form ‘name=value’ (no space before or after ‘=’), or plain ‘name’ if there
is no value, i.e., a boolean variable. If a name begins with ‘no’, as in ‘set
nosave’, the effect is the same as invoking the unset command with the remaining
part of the variable (‘unset save’). [v15 behaviour may differ] In conjunction
with the wysh (or local) command prefix(es) Shell-style argument quoting can be
used to quote arguments as necessary. [v15 behaviour may differ] Otherwise
quotation marks may be placed around any part of the assignment statement to quote
blanks or tabs.
When operating in global scope any ‘name’ that is known to map to an environment
variable will automatically cause updates in the program environment (unsetting a
variable in the environment requires corresponding system support) — use the
command environ for further environmental control. If the command modifier local
has been used to enforce local scoping then the given user variables will be
garbage collected when the local scope is left; for INTERNAL VARIABLES, however,
local behaves the same as if localopts would have been set (temporarily), which
means that changes are inherited by deeper scopes. Also see varshow and the
sections INTERNAL VARIABLES and ENVIRONMENT.
? wysh set indentprefix=' -> '
? wysh set atab=$'' aspace=' ' zero=0
shcodec Apply shell quoting rules to the given raw-data arguments. Supports vput (see
Command modifiers). The first argument specifies the operation: [+]e[ncode] or
d[ecode] cause shell quoting to be applied to the remains of the line, and
expanded away thereof, respectively. If the former is prefixed with a plus-sign,
the quoted result will not be roundtrip enabled, and thus can be decoded only in
the very same environment that was used to perform the encode; also see
mle-quote-rndtrip. If the coding operation fails the error number ! is set to
^ERR-CANCELED, and the unmodified input is used as the result; the error number
may change again due to output or result storage errors.
shell [Only new quoting rules] (sh) Invokes an interactive version of the shell, and
returns its exit status.
shortcut, unshortcut
[Only new quoting rules] Manage the file- or pathname shortcuts as documented for
folder. The latter command deletes all shortcuts given as arguments, or all at
once when given the asterisk ‘*’. The former shows the list of all currently
defined shortcuts if used without arguments, the target of the given with a single
argument. Otherwise arguments are treated as pairs of shortcuts and their desired
expansion, creating new or updating already existing ones.
shift [Only new quoting rules] Shift the positional parameter stack (starting at 1) by
the given number (which must be a positive decimal), or 1 if no argument has been
given. It is an error if the value exceeds the number of positional parameters.
If the given number is 0, no action is performed, successfully. The stack as such
can be managed via vpospar. Note this command will fail in account and hook
macros unless the positional parameter stack has been explicitly created in the
current context via vpospar.
show Like type, but performs neither MIME decoding nor decryption, so that the raw
message text is shown.
size (si) Shows the size in characters of each message of the given message list.
sleep [Only new quoting rules] Sleep for the specified number of seconds (and optionally
milliseconds), by default interruptible. If a third argument is given the sleep
will be uninterruptible, otherwise the error number ! will be set to ^ERR-INTR if
the sleep has been interrupted. The command will fail and the error number will
be ^ERR-OVERFLOW if the given duration(s) overflow the time datatype, and
^ERR-INVAL if the given durations are no valid integers.
sort, unsort
The latter command disables sorted or threaded mode, returns to normal message
order and, if the header variable is set, displays a header summary. The former
command shows the current sorting criterion when used without an argument, but
creates a sorted representation of the current folder otherwise, and changes the
next command and the addressing modes such that they refer to messages in the
sorted order. Message numbers are the same as in regular mode. If the header
variable is set, a header summary in the new order is also displayed. Automatic
folder sorting can be enabled by setting the autosort variable, as in ‘set
autosort=thread’. Possible sorting criterions are:
date Sort the messages by their ‘Date:’ field, that is by the time they were
sent.
from Sort messages by the value of their ‘From:’ field, that is by the address
of the sender. If the showname variable is set, the sender's real name
(if any) is used.
size Sort the messages by their size.
spam [Option] Sort the message by their spam score, as has been classified by
spamrate.
status Sort the messages by their message status.
subject Sort the messages by their subject.
thread Create a threaded display.
to Sort messages by the value of their ‘To:’ field, that is by the address
of the recipient. If the showname variable is set, the recipient's real
name (if any) is used.
source [Only new quoting rules] (so) The source command reads commands from the given
file. Filename transformations will be applied. If the given expanded argument
ends with a vertical bar ‘|’ then the argument will instead be interpreted as a
shell command and S-nail will read the output generated by it. Dependent on the
settings of posix and errexit, and also dependent on whether the command modifier
ignerr had been used, encountering errors will stop sourcing of the given input.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Note that source cannot be used from within macros that
execute as folder-hooks or accounts, i.e., it can only be called from macros that
were called.
source_if
[Only new quoting rules] The difference to source (beside not supporting pipe
syntax aka shell command input) is that this command will not generate an error
nor warn if the given file argument cannot be opened successfully.
spamclear
[Option] Takes a list of messages and clears their ‘is-spam’ flag.
spamforget
[Option] Takes a list of messages and causes the spam-interface to forget it has
ever used them to train its Bayesian filter. Unless otherwise noted the ‘is-spam’
flag of the message is inspected to chose whether a message shall be forgotten to
be “ham” or “spam”.
spamham [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of the
spam-interface that they are “ham”. This also clears the ‘is-spam’ flag of the
messages in question.
spamrate [Option] Takes a list of messages and rates them using the configured
spam-interface, without modifying the messages, but setting their ‘is-spam’ flag
as appropriate; because the spam rating headers are lost the rate will be
forgotten once the mailbox is left. Refer to the manual section Handling spam for
the complete picture of spam handling in S-nail.
spamset [Option] Takes a list of messages and sets their ‘is-spam’ flag.
spamspam [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of the
spam-interface that they are “spam”. This also sets the ‘is-spam’ flag of the
messages in question.
thread [Obsolete] The same as ‘sort thread’ (consider using a ‘commandalias’ as
necessary).
tls [Only new quoting rules] TLS information and management command multiplexer to aid
in Encrypted network communication, mostly available only if the term ‘,+sockets,’
is included in features. Commands support vput if so documented (see Command
modifiers). The result that is shown in case of errors is always the empty
string, errors can be identified via the error number !. For example, string
length overflows are caught and set ! to ^ERR-OVERFLOW. The TLS configuration is
honoured, especially tls-verify.
? vput tls result fingerprint pop3s://ex.am.ple
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME: $result
certchain Show the complete verified peer certificate chain. Includes
informational fields in conjunction with verbose.
certificate Show only the peer certificate, without any signers. Includes
informational fields in conjunction with verbose.
fingerprint Show the tls-fingerprint-digested fingerprint of the certificate of
the given HOST (‘server:port’, where the port defaults to the HTTPS
port, 443). tls-fingerprint is actively ignored for the runtime of this
command.
Top Like top but always uses the headerpick ‘type’ slot for white- and blacklisting
header fields.
top (to) Takes a message list and types out the first toplines lines of each message
on the user's terminal. Unless a special selection has been established for the
‘top’ slot of the headerpick command, the only header fields that are displayed
are ‘From:’, ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’, and ‘Subject:’. Top will always use the ‘type’
headerpick selection instead. It is possible to apply compression to what is
displayed by setting topsqueeze. Messages are decrypted and converted to the
terminal character set if necessary.
touch (tou) Takes a message list and marks the messages for saving in the secondary
mailbox MBOX. S-nail deviates from the POSIX standard with this command, as a
following next command will display the following message instead of the current
one.
Type (T) Like type but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick
selection, and all visualizable parts of MIME ‘multipart/alternative’ messages.
type (t) Takes a message list and types out each message on the user's terminal. The
display of message headers is selectable via headerpick. For MIME multipart
messages, all parts with a content type of ‘text’, all parts which have a
registered MIME type handler (see HTML mail and MIME attachments) which produces
plain text output, and all ‘message’ parts are shown, others are hidden except for
their headers. Messages are decrypted and converted to the terminal character set
if necessary. The command mimeview can be used to display parts which are not
displayable as plain text.
unaccount
See account.
unalias (una) See alias.
unanswered
See answered.
unbind See bind.
uncollapse
See collapse.
uncolour See colour.
undefine See define.
undelete See delete.
undraft See draft.
unflag See flag.
unfwdignore
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unfwdretain
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unignore Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unmimetype
See mimetype.
unmlist See mlist.
unmlsubscribe
See mlsubscribe.
Unread Same as unread.
unread Takes a message list and marks each message as not having been read.
unretain Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unsaveignore
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unsaveretain
[Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.
unset [Only new quoting rules] (uns) See set.
unshortcut
See shortcut.
unsort See short.
unthread [Obsolete] Same as unsort.
urlcodec Perform URL percent codec operations on the raw-data argument, rather according to
RFC 3986. The first argument specifies the operation: e[ncode] or d[ecode]
perform plain URL percent en- and decoding, respectively. p[ath]enc[ode] and
p[ath]dec[ode] perform a slightly modified operation which should be better for
pathnames: it does not allow a tilde ‘~’, and will neither accept hyphen-minus ‘-’
nor dot ‘’. as an initial character. The remains of the line form the URL data
which is to be converted. This is a character set agnostic operation, and it may
thus decode bytes which are invalid in the current ttycharset.
Supports vput (see Command modifiers), and manages the error number !. If the
coding operation fails the error number ! is set to ^ERR-CANCELED, and the
unmodified input is used as the result; the error number may change again due to
output or result storage errors. [v15 behaviour may differ] This command does not
know about URLs beside what is documented. (vexpr offers a makeprint subcommand,
shall the URL be displayed.)
varshow [Only new quoting rules] This command produces the same output as the listing mode
of set, including verboseity adjustments, but only for the given variables.
verify [Option] Takes a message list and verifies each message. If a message is not a
S/MIME signed message, verification will fail for it. The verification process
checks if the message was signed using a valid certificate, if the message
sender's email address matches one of those contained within the certificate, and
if the message content has been altered.
version Shows the version and features of S-nail, optionally in a more verbose form which
also includes the build and running system environment. This command supports
vput (see Command modifiers).
vexpr [Only new quoting rules] A multiplexer command which offers signed 64-bit numeric
calculations, as well as other, mostly string-based operations. C-style byte
string operations are available via csop. The first argument defines the number,
type, and meaning of the remaining arguments. An empty number argument is treated
as 0. Supports vput (see Command modifiers). The result shown in case of errors
is ‘-1’ for usage errors and numeric operations, the empty string otherwise;
“soft” errors, like when a search operation failed, will also set the ! error
number to ^ERR-NODATA. Except when otherwise noted numeric arguments are parsed
as signed 64-bit numbers, and errors will be reported in the error number ! as the
numeric error ^ERR-RANGE.
Numeric operations work on one or two signed 64-bit integers. Numbers prefixed
with ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ are interpreted as hexadecimal (base 16) numbers, whereas ‘0’
indicates octal (base 8), and ‘0b’ as well as ‘0B’ denote binary (base 2) numbers.
It is possible to use any base in between 2 and 36, inclusive, with the
‘BASE#number’ notation, where the base is given as an unsigned decimal number, so
‘16#AFFE’ is a different way of specifying a hexadecimal number. Unsigned
interpretation of a number can be enforced by prefixing an ‘u’ (case-
insensitively), as in ‘u-110’; this is not necessary for power-of-two bases (2, 4,
8, 16 and 32), which will be interpreted as unsigned by default, but it still
makes a difference regarding overflow detection and overflow constant. It is
possible to enforce signed interpretation by (instead) prefixing a ‘s’ (case-
insensitively). The number sign notation uses a permissive parse mode and as such
supports complicated conditions out of the box:
? wysh set ifs=:;read i;unset ifs;echo $i;vexpr pb 2 10#$i
-009
< -009>
0b1001
One integer is expected by assignment (equals sign ‘=’), which does nothing but
parsing the argument, thus detecting validity and possible overflow conditions,
unary not (tilde ‘~’), which creates the bitwise complement, and unary plus and
minus. Two integers are used by addition (plus sign ‘+’), subtraction (hyphen-
minus ‘-’), multiplication (asterisk ‘*’), division (solidus ‘/’) and modulo
(percent sign ‘%’), as well as for the bitwise operators logical or (vertical bar
‘|’, to be quoted) , bitwise and (ampersand ‘&’, to be quoted) , bitwise xor
(circumflex ‘^’), the bitwise signed left- and right shifts (‘<<’, ‘>>’), as well
as for the unsigned right shift ‘>>>’.
Another numeric operation is pbase, which takes a number base in between 2 and 36,
inclusive, and will act on the second number given just the same as what equals
sign ‘=’ does, but the number result will be formatted in the base given, as a
signed 64-bit number unless unsigned interpretation of the input number had been
forced (with an u prefix).
Numeric operations support a saturated mode via the question mark ‘?’ modifier
suffix; the keyword ‘saturated’ is optional, ‘+?’, ‘+?satu’, and ‘+?saturated’ are
therefore identical. In saturated mode overflow errors and division and modulo by
zero are no longer reported via the exit status, but the result will linger at the
minimum or maximum possible value, instead of overflowing (or trapping). This is
true also for the argument parse step. For the bitwise shifts, the saturated
maximum is 63. Any caught overflow will be reported via the error number ! as
^ERR-OVERFLOW.
? vput vexpr res -? +1 -9223372036854775808
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res
0/75/OVERFLOW:-9223372036854775808
Character set agnostic string functions have no notion of locale settings and
character sets.
date-utc Outputs the current date and time in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
with values named such that ‘vput vexpr x date-utc; eval wysh set $x’
creates accessible variables.
date-stamp-utc Outputs a RFC 3339 internet date/time format of UTC.
epoch The seconds and nanoseconds since the Unix epoch (1970-01-01T00:00:00)
named ‘epoch_sec’ and ‘epoch_nsec’ such that ‘vput vexpr x epoch; eval
wysh set $x’ creates accessible variables.
file-expand Performs the usual Filename transformations on its argument.
file-stat, file-lstat Perform the usual Filename transformations on the argument,
then call stat(2) and lstat(2), respectively, and output values such
that ‘vput vexpr x file-stat FILE; eval wysh set $x’ creates accessible
variables. The variable ‘st_type’ uses solidus ‘/’ to denote
directories, commercial at ‘@’ for links, number sign ‘#’ for block
devices, percent sign ‘%’ for for character devices, vertical bar ‘|’
for FIFOs, equal sign ‘=’ for sockets, and the period ‘.’ for the rest.
random Generates a random string of the given length, or of PATH_MAX bytes (a
constant from /usr/include) if the value 0 is given; the random string
will be base64url encoded according to RFC 4648, and thus be usable as a
(portable) filename.
String operations work, sufficient support provided, according to the active
user's locale encoding and character set (see Character sets). Where the question
mark ‘?’ modifier suffix is supported, a case-insensitive operation mode is
available; the keyword ‘case’ is optional, ‘regex?’ and ‘regex?case’ are therefore
identical.
makeprint (One-way) Converts the argument to something safely printable on the
terminal.
regex [Option] A string operation that will try to match the first argument
with the regular expression given as the second argument. ‘?’ modifier
suffix is supported. If the optional third argument has been given then
instead of showing the match offset a replacement operation is
performed: the third argument is treated as if specified within dollar-
single-quote (see Shell-style argument quoting), and any occurrence of a
positional parameter, for example 0, 1 etc. is replaced with the
according match group of the regular expression:
? vput vexpr res regex bananarama \
(.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}au\$2'
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
1/61/NODATA::
? vput vexpr res regex?case bananarama \
(.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}uauf\$2'
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
0/0/NONE:bauauframa:
vpospar [Only new quoting rules] Manage the positional parameter stack (see 1, #, *, @ as
well as shift). If the first argument is ‘clear’, then the positional parameter
stack of the current context, or the global one, if there is none, is cleared. If
it is ‘set’, then the remaining arguments will be used to (re)create the stack, if
the parameter stack size limit is excessed an ^ERR-OVERFLOW error will occur.
If the first argument is ‘quote’, a round-trip capable representation of the stack
contents is created, with each quoted parameter separated from each other with the
first character of ifs, and followed by the first character of if-ws, if that is
not empty and not identical to the first. If that results in no separation at all
a space character is used. This mode supports vput (see Command modifiers).
I.e., the subcommands ‘set’ and ‘quote’ can be used (in conjunction with eval) to
(re)create an argument stack from and to a single variable losslessly.
? vpospar set hey, "'you ", world!
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
? vput vpospar x quote
? vpospar clear
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
? eval vpospar set ${x}
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
visual (v) Takes a message list and invokes the VISUAL display editor on each message.
Modified contents are discarded unless the writebackedited variable is set, and
are not used unless the mailbox can be written to and the editor returns a
successful exit status. edit can be used instead for a less display oriented
editor.
write (w) For conventional messages the body without all headers is written. The
original message is never marked for deletion in the originating mail folder. The
output is decrypted and converted to its native format as necessary. If the
output file exists, the text is appended. If a message is in MIME multipart
format its first part is written to the specified file as for conventional
messages, handling of the remains depends on the execution mode. No special
handling of compressed files is performed.
In interactive mode the user is consecutively asked for the filenames of the
processed parts. For convenience saving of each part may be skipped by giving an
empty value, the same result as writing it to /dev/null. Shell piping the part
content by specifying a leading vertical bar ‘|’ character for the filename is
supported. Other user input undergoes the usual Filename transformations,
including shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions (glob(7)) and shell variable
expansion for the message as such, not the individual parts, and contents of the
destination file are overwritten if the file previously existed. Character set
conversion to ttycharset is performed when saving text data.
[v15 behaviour may differ] In non-interactive mode any part which does not specify
a filename is ignored, and suspicious parts of filenames of the remaining parts
are URL percent encoded (as via urlcodec) to prevent injection of malicious
character sequences, resulting in a filename that will be written into the current
directory. Existing files will not be overwritten, instead the part number or a
dot are appended after a number sign ‘#’ to the name until file creation succeeds
(or fails due to other reasons).
xcall [Only new quoting rules] The sole difference to call is that the new macro is
executed in place of the current one, which will not regain control: all resources
of the current macro will be released first. This implies that any setting
covered by localopts will be forgotten and covered variables will become cleaned
up. If this command is not used from within a called macro it will silently be (a
more expensive variant of) call.
xit (x) A synonym for exit.
z [Only new quoting rules] S-nail presents message headers in screenfuls as
described under the headers command. Without arguments this command scrolls to
the next window of messages, likewise if the argument is ‘+’. An argument of ‘-’
scrolls to the last, ‘^’ scrolls to the first, and ‘$’ to the last screen of
messages. A number argument prefixed by ‘+’ or ‘-’ indicates that the window is
calculated in relation to the current position, and a number without a prefix
specifies an absolute position.
Z [Only new quoting rules] Similar to z, but scrolls to the next or previous window
that contains at least one ‘new’ or flagged message.
COMMAND ESCAPES
Command escapes are available in Compose mode during interactive usage, when explicitly
requested via -~, and in batch mode (-#). They perform special functions, like editing
headers of the message being composed, calling normal COMMANDS, yielding a shell, etc.
Command escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines, and consist of an escape
followed by a command character. The default escape character is the tilde ‘~’.
Unless otherwise documented command escapes ensure proper updates of the error number ! and
the exit status ?. The variable errexit controls whether a failed operation errors out
message compose mode and causes program exit. Escapes may be prefixed by none to multiple
single character command modifiers, interspersed whitespace is ignored:
• An effect equivalent to the command modifier ignerr can be achieved with hyphen-minus
‘-’, overriding errexit.
• The modifier dollar ‘$’ evaluates the remains of the line; also see Shell-style argument
quoting. [v15 behaviour may differ] For now the entire input line is evaluated as a
whole; to avoid that control operators like semicolon ; are interpreted unintentionally,
they must be quoted.
Addition of the command line to the [Option]al history can be prevented by placing
whitespace directly after escape. The [Option]al key bindings support a compose mode
specific context. The following command escapes are supported:
~~ string
Insert the string of text in the message prefaced by a single ‘~’. (If the escape
character has been changed, that character must be doubled instead.)
~! command
Execute the indicated shell command which follows, replacing unescaped exclamation
marks with the previously executed command if the internal variable bang is set,
then return to the message.
~. End compose mode and send the message. The hooks on-compose-splice-shell and
on-compose-splice, in order, will be called when set, after which, in interactive
mode askatend (leading to askcc, askbcc) and askattach will be checked as well as
asksend, after which a set on-compose-leave hook will be called, autocc and
autobcc will be joined in if set, finally a given message-inject-tail will be
incorporated, after which the compose mode is left.
~: S-nail-command or ~_ S-nail-command
Can be used to execute COMMANDS (which are allowed in compose mode).
~< filename
Identical to ~r.
~<! command
command is executed using the shell. Its standard output is inserted into the
message.
~? [Option] Write a summary of command escapes.
~@ [filename...]
Append or edit the list of attachments. Does not manage the error number ! and
the exit status ? (please use ~^ if error handling is necessary). The append mode
expects a list of filename arguments as shell tokens (see Shell-style argument
quoting; token-separating commas are ignored, too), to be interpreted as
documented for the command line option -a, with the message number exception as
below.
Without filename arguments the attachment list is edited, entry by entry; if a
filename is left empty, that attachment is deleted from the list; once the end of
the list is reached either new attachments may be entered or the session can be
quit by committing an empty “new” attachment. In non-interactive mode or in batch
mode (-#) the list of attachments is effectively not edited but instead recreated;
again, an empty input ends list creation.
For all modes, if a given filename solely consists of the number sign ‘#’ followed
by either a valid message number of the currently active mailbox, or by a period
‘.’, referring to the current message of the active mailbox, the so-called “dot”,
then the given message is attached as a ‘message/rfc822’ MIME message part. The
number sign must be quoted to avoid misinterpretation as a shell comment
character.
~| command
Pipe the message text through the specified filter command. If the command gives
no output or terminates abnormally, retain the original text of the message. The
command fmt(1) is often used as a rejustifying filter.
If the first character of the command is a vertical bar, then the entire message
including header fields is subject to the filter command, so ‘~|| echo Fcc:
/tmp/test; cat’ will prepend a file-carbon-copy message header. Also see ~e, ~v.
~^ cmd [subcmd [arg3 [arg4]]]
Inspect and modify the message using the semantics of digmsg, therefore arguments
are evaluated according to Shell-style argument quoting. Error number ! and exit
status ? are not managed: errors are handled via the protocol, and hard errors
like I/O failures cannot be handled.
The protocol consists of command lines followed by (a) response line(s). The
first field of the response line represents a status code which specifies whether
a command was successful or not, whether result data is to be expected, and if,
the format of the result data. Response data will be shell quoted as necessary
for consumption by readsh, or eval and vpospar, to name a few. Error status code
lines may optionally contain additional context:
‘210’ Status ok; the remains of the line are the result.
‘211’ Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.
What follows are lines of result addresses, terminated by an empty line.
All the input, including the empty line, must be consumed before further
commands can be issued. Address lines consist of two token, first the
plain network address, e.g., ‘bob@exam.ple’, followed by the (quoted)
full address as known: ‘'(Lovely) Bob <bob@exam.ple>'’. Non-network
addresses use the first field to indicate the type (hyphen-minus ‘-’ for
files, vertical bar ‘|’ for pipes, and number sign ‘#’ for names which
will undergo alias processing) instead, the actual value will be in the
second field.
‘212’ Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.
What follows are lines of furtherly unspecified (quoted) string content,
terminated by an empty line. All the input, including the empty line,
must be consumed before further commands can be issued.
‘500’ Syntax error; invalid command.
‘501’ Syntax error or otherwise invalid parameters or arguments.
‘505’ Error: an argument fails verification. For example an invalid address
has been specified (also see expandaddr), or an attempt was made to
modify anything in S-nail's own namespace, or a modifying subcommand has
been used on a read-only message.
‘506’ Error: an otherwise valid argument is rendered invalid due to context.
For example, a second address is added to a header which may consist of
a single address only.
If a command indicates failure then the message will have remained unmodified.
Most commands can fail with ‘500’ if required arguments are missing, or excessive
arguments have been given (false command usage). ([v15 behaviour may differ] The
latter does not yet occur regularly, because as stated in Shell-style argument
quoting our argument parser is not yet smart enough to work on subcommand base;
for example one might get excess argument error for a three argument subcommand
that receives four arguments, but not for a four argument subcommand which
receives six arguments: here excess will be joined.) The following (case-
insensitive) commands are supported:
attachment This command allows listing, removal and addition of message
attachments. The second argument specifies the subcommand to apply, one
of:
attribute This uses the same search mechanism as described for remove and
prints any known attributes of the first found attachment via
‘212’ upon success or ‘501’ if no such attachment can be found.
The attributes are written as lines with a keyword and a value
token.
attribute-at This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove-at and is otherwise identical to attribute.
attribute-set This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove, and will set the attribute given as the fourth to the
value given as the fifth token argument. If the value is an
empty token, then the given attribute is removed, or reset to a
default value if existence of the attribute is crucial.
It returns via ‘210’ upon success, with the index of the found
attachment following, ‘505’ for message attachments or if the
given keyword is invalid, and ‘501’ if no such attachment can
be found. The following keywords may be used (case-
insensitively):
‘filename’ Sets the filename of the MIME part, i.e., the name
that is used for display and when (suggesting a
name for) saving (purposes).
‘content-description’ Associate some descriptive information to
the attachment's content, used in favour of the
plain filename by some MUAs.
‘content-id’ May be used for uniquely identifying MIME entities
in several contexts; this expects a special
reference address format as defined in RFC 2045 and
generates a ‘505’ upon address content verification
failure.
‘content-type’ Defines the media type/subtype of the part,
which is managed automatically, but can be
overwritten.
‘content-disposition’ Automatically set to the string
‘attachment’.
attribute-set-at This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove-at and is otherwise identical to attribute-set.
insert Adds the attachment given as the third argument, specified
exactly as documented for the command line option -a, and
supporting the message number extension as documented for ~@.
This reports ‘210’ upon success, with the index of the new
attachment following, ‘505’ if the given file cannot be opened,
‘506’ if an on-the-fly performed character set conversion
fails, otherwise ‘501’ is reported; this is also reported if
character set conversion is requested but not available.
list List all attachments via ‘212’, or report ‘501’ if no
attachments exist. This command is the default command of
attachment if no second argument has been given.
remove This will remove the attachment given as the third argument,
and report ‘210’ upon success or ‘501’ if no such attachment
can be found. If there exists any path component in the given
argument, then an exact match of the path which has been used
to create the attachment is used directly, but if only the
basename of that path matches then all attachments are
traversed to find an exact match first, and the removal occurs
afterwards; if multiple basenames match, a ‘506’ error occurs.
Message attachments are treated as absolute pathnames.
If no path component exists in the given argument, then all
attachments will be searched for ‘filename=’ parameter matches
as well as for matches of the basename of the path which has
been used when the attachment has been created; multiple
matches result in a ‘506’.
remove-at This will interpret the third argument as a number and remove
the attachment at that list position (counting from one!),
reporting ‘210’ upon success or ‘505’ if the argument is not a
number or ‘501’ if no such attachment exists.
header This command allows listing, inspection, and editing of message headers.
Header name case is not normalized, so that case-insensitive comparison
should be used when matching names. The second argument specifies the
subcommand to apply, one of:
insert Create a new or an additional instance of the header given in
the third argument, with the header body content as given in
the fourth token. It may return ‘501’ if the third argument
specifies a free-form header field name that is invalid, or if
body content extraction fails to succeed, ‘505’ if any
extracted address does not pass syntax and/or security checks
or on S-nail namespace violations, and ‘506’ to indicate
prevention of excessing a single-instance header — note that
‘Subject:’ can be appended to (a space separator will be added
automatically first). ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’ and ‘Bcc:’ support the
‘?single’ modifier to enforce treatment as a single addressee,
for example ‘header insert To?single: 'exa, <m@ple>'’; the word
‘single’ is optional.
‘210’ is returned upon success, followed by the name of the
header and the list position of the newly inserted instance.
The list position is always 1 for single-instance header
fields. All free-form header fields are managed in a single
list; also see customhdr.
list Without a third argument a list of all yet existing headers is
given via ‘210’; this command is the default command of header
if no second argument has been given. A third argument
restricts output to the given header only, which may fail with
‘501’ if no such field is defined.
remove This will remove all instances of the header given as the third
argument, reporting ‘210’ upon success, ‘501’ if no such header
can be found, and ‘505’ on S-nail namespace violations.
remove-at This will remove from the header given as the third argument
the instance at the list position (counting from one!) given
with the fourth argument, reporting ‘210’ upon success or ‘505’
if the list position argument is not a number or on S-nail
namespace violations, and ‘501’ if no such header instance
exists.
show Shows the content of the header given as the third argument.
Dependent on the header type this may respond with ‘211’ or
‘212’; any failure results in ‘501’.
In compose-mode read-only access to optional pseudo headers in the S-nail
private namespace is available:
‘Mailx-Command:’
The name of the command that generates the message, one of
‘forward’, ‘Lreply’, ‘mail’, ‘Reply’, ‘reply’, ‘resend’. This
pseudo header always exists (in compose-mode).
‘Mailx-Raw-To:’
‘Mailx-Raw-Cc:’
‘Mailx-Raw-Bcc:’
Represent the frozen initial state of these headers before any
transformation (alias, alternates, recipients-in-cc etc.) took
place.
‘Mailx-Orig-Sender:’
‘Mailx-Orig-From:’
‘Mailx-Orig-To:’
‘Mailx-Orig-Cc:’
‘Mailx-Orig-Bcc:’
The values of said headers of the original message which has
been addressed by any of reply, forward, resend. The sender
field is special as it is filled in with the sole sender
according to RFC 5322 rules, it may thus be equal to the from
field.
help, ? Show an abstract of the above commands via ‘211’.
version This command will print the protocol version via ‘210’.
~A The same as ‘~i Sign’.
~a The same as ‘~i sign’.
~b name ...
Add the given names to the list of blind carbon copy recipients.
~c name ...
Add the given names to the list of carbon copy recipients.
~d Read the file specified by the DEAD variable into the message.
~e Invoke the text EDITOR on the message collected so far, then return to compose
mode. ~v can be used for a more display oriented editor, and ~|| offers a pipe-
based editing approach.
~F messages
Read the named messages into the message being sent, including all message headers
and MIME parts, and honouring forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. If no messages are specified, read in the current message,
the “dot”.
~f messages
Read the named messages into the message being sent. If no messages are
specified, read in the current message, the “dot”. Strips down the list of header
fields according to the ‘forward’ (with posix: ‘type’) white- and blacklist
selection of headerpick, and honours forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head
and forward-inject-tail. For MIME multipart messages, only the first displayable
part is included.
~H In interactive mode, edit the message header fields ‘From:’, ‘Reply-To:’ and
‘Sender:’ by typing each one in turn and allowing the user to edit the field. The
default values for these fields originate from the from, reply-to and sender
variables. In non-interactive mode this sets ^ERR-NOTTY.
~h In interactive mode, edit the message header fields ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’, ‘Bcc:’ and
‘Subject:’ by typing each one in turn and allowing the user to edit the field. In
non-interactive mode this sets ^ERR-NOTTY.
~I variable
Insert the value of the specified variable into the message. The message remains
unaltered if the variable is unset or empty. Any embedded character sequences
‘\t’ horizontal tabulator and ‘\n’ line feed are expanded in posix mode; otherwise
the expansion should occur at set time ([v15 behaviour may differ] by using the
command modifier wysh).
~i variable
Like ~I, but appends a newline character.
~M messages
Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by indentprefix. If
no messages are specified, read the current message, the “dot”. Honours
forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head and forward-inject-tail.
~m messages
Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by indentprefix. If
no messages are specified, read the current message, the “dot”. Strips down the
list of header fields according to the ‘type’ white- and blacklist selection of
headerpick. Honours forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. For MIME multipart messages, only the first displayable part
is included.
~p Display the message collected so far, prefaced by the message header fields and
followed by the attachment list, if any.
~Q Read in the given / current message(s) using the algorithm of quote (except that
is implicitly assumed, even if not set), honouring quote-add-cc.
~q Abort the message being sent, copying it to the file specified by the DEAD
variable if save is set.
~R filename
Identical to ~r, but indent each line that has been read by indentprefix.
~r filename [HERE-delimiter]
Read the named file, object to Filename transformations excluding shell globs and
variable expansions, into the message; if filename is the hyphen-minus ‘-’ then
standard input is used (for pasting, for example). Only in this latter mode
HERE-delimiter may be given: if it is data will be read in until the given
HERE-delimiter is seen on a line by itself, and encountering EOF is an error; the
HERE-delimiter is a required argument in non-interactive mode; if it is single-
quote quoted then the pasted content will not be expanded, [v15 behaviour may
differ] otherwise a future version of S-nail may perform shell-style expansion on
the content.
~s string
Cause the named string to become the current subject field. Newline (NL) and
carriage-return (CR) bytes are invalid and will be normalized to space (SP)
characters.
~t name ...
Add the given name(s) to the direct recipient list.
~U messages
Read in the given / current message(s) excluding all headers, indented by
indentprefix. Honours forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail.
~u messages
Read in the given / current message(s), excluding all headers. Honours
forward-add-cc as well as forward-inject-head and forward-inject-tail.
~v Invoke the VISUAL editor on the message collected so far, then return to compose
mode. ~e can be used for a less display oriented editor, and ~|| offers a pipe-
based editing approach.
~w filename
Write the message onto the named file, which is object to the usual Filename
transformations. If the file exists, the message is appended to it.
~x Same as ~q, except that the message is not saved at all.
INTERNAL VARIABLES
Internal S-nail variables are controlled via the set and unset commands; prefixing a
variable name with the string ‘no’ and calling set has the same effect as using unset:
‘unset crt’ and ‘set nocrt’ do the same thing. varshow will give more insight on the given
variable(s), and set, when called without arguments, will show a listing of all variables.
Both commands support a more verbose listing mode. Some well-known variables will also
become inherited from the program ENVIRONMENT implicitly, others can be imported explicitly
with the command environ and henceforth share said properties.
Two different kinds of internal variables exist, and both of which can also form chains.
There are boolean variables, which can only be in one of the two states “set” and “unset”,
and value variables with a(n optional) string value. For the latter proper quoting is
necessary upon assignment time, the introduction of the section COMMANDS documents the
supported quoting rules.
? wysh set one=val\ 1 two="val 2" \
three='val "3"' four=$'val \'4\''; \
varshow one two three four; \
unset one two three four
Dependent upon the actual option string values may become interpreted as colour names,
command specifications, normal text, etc. They may be treated as numbers, in which case
decimal values are expected if so documented, but otherwise any numeric format and base that
is valid and understood by the vexpr command may be used, too.
There also exists a special kind of string value, the “boolean string”, which must either be
a decimal integer (in which case ‘0’ is false and ‘1’ and any other value is true) or any of
the (case-insensitive) strings ‘off’, ‘no’, ‘n’ and ‘false’ for a false boolean and ‘on’,
‘yes’, ‘y’ and ‘true’ for a true boolean; a special kind of boolean string is the
“quadoption”: it can optionally be prefixed with the (case-insensitive) term ‘ask-’, as in
‘ask-yes’; in interactive mode the user will be prompted, otherwise the actual boolean is
used.
Variable chains extend a plain ‘variable’ with ‘variable-HOST’ and ‘variable-USER@HOST’
variants. Here ‘HOST’ will be converted to all lowercase when looked up (but not when the
variable is set or unset!), [Option]ally IDNA converted, and indeed means ‘server:port’ if a
‘port’ had been specified in the contextual Uniform Resource Locator URL, see On URL syntax
and credential lookup. Even though this mechanism is based on URLs no URL percent encoding
may be applied to neither of ‘USER’ nor ‘HOST’, variable chains need to be specified using
raw data; the mentioned section contains examples. Variables which support chains are
explicitly documented as such, and S-nail treats the base name of any such variable special,
meaning that users should not create custom names like ‘variable-xyz’ in order to avoid
false classifications and treatment of such variables.
Initial settings
The standard POSIX 2008/Cor 2-2016 mandates the following initial variable settings:
noallnet, noappend, asksub, noaskbcc, noautoprint, nobang, nocmd, nocrt, nodebug, nodot,
escape set to ‘~’, noflipr, nofolder, header, nohold, noignore, noignoreeof, nokeep,
nokeepsave, nometoo, nooutfolder, nopage, prompt set to ‘? ’, noquiet, norecord, save,
nosendwait, noshowto, noSign, nosign, toplines set to ‘5’.
However, S-nail has built-in some initial (and some default) settings which (may) diverge,
others may become adjusted by one of the Resource files. Displaying the former is
accomplished via set: ‘$ s-nail -:/ -v -Xset -Xx’. In general this implementation sets (and
has extended the meaning of) sendwait, and does not support the noonehop variable – use
command line options or mta-arguments to pass options through to a mta. The default global
resource file sets, among others, the variables hold, keep and keepsave, establishes a
default headerpick selection etc., and should thus be taken into account.
Variables
? (Read-only) The exit status of the last command, or the return value of the macro
called last. This status has a meaning in the state machine: in conjunction with
errexit any non-0 exit status will cause a program exit, and in posix mode any
error while loading (any of the) resource files will have the same effect.
ignerr, one of the Command modifiers, can be used to instruct the state machine to
ignore errors.
! (Read-only) The current error number (errno(3)), which is set after an error
occurred; it is also available via ^ERR, and the error name and documentation
string can be queried via ^ERRNAME and ^ERRDOC. [v15 behaviour may differ] This
machinery is new and the error number is only really usable if a command
explicitly states that it manages the variable !, for others errno will be used in
case of errors, or ^ERR-INVAL if that is 0: it thus may or may not reflect the
real error. The error number may be set with the command return.
^ (Read-only) This is a multiplexer variable which performs dynamic expansion of the
requested state or condition, of which there are:
^ERR, ^ERRDOC, ^ERRNAME
The number, documentation, and name of the current errno(3),
respectively, which is usually set after an error occurred. The
documentation is an [Option], the name is used if not available. [v15
behaviour may differ] This machinery is new and is usually reliable only
if a command explicitly states that it manages the variable !, which is
effectively identical to ^ERR. Each of those variables can be suffixed
with a hyphen minus followed by a name or number, in which case the
expansion refers to the given error. Note this is a direct mapping of
(a subset of) the system error values:
define work {
eval echo \$1: \$^ERR-$1:\
\$^ERRNAME-$1: \$^ERRDOC-$1
vput vexpr i + "$1" 1
if [ $i -lt 16 ]
\xcall work $i
end
}
call work 0
^ERRQUEUE-COUNT, ^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS
The number of messages in the [Option]al queue of errors, and a string
indicating queue state: empty or (translated) “ERROR”. Always 0 and the
empty string, respectively, unless features includes ‘,+errors,’.
* (Read-only) Expands all positional parameters (see 1), separated by the first
character of the value of ifs. [v15 behaviour may differ] The special semantics
of the equally named special parameter of the sh(1) are not yet supported.
@ (Read-only) Expands all positional parameters (see 1), separated by a space
character. If placed in double quotation marks, each positional parameter is
properly quoted to expand to a single parameter again.
# (Read-only) Expands to the number of positional parameters, i.e., the size of the
positional parameter stack in decimal.
0 (Read-only) Inside the scope of a defined and called macro this expands to the
name of the calling macro, or to the empty string if the macro is running from
top-level. For the [Option]al regular expression search and replace operator of
vexpr this expands to the entire matching expression. It represents the program
name in global context.
1 (Read-only) Access of the positional parameter stack. All further parameters can
be accessed with this syntax, too, ‘2’, ‘3’ etc.; positional parameters can be
shifted off the stack by calling shift. The parameter stack contains, for
example, the arguments of a called defined macro, the matching groups of the
[Option]al regular expression search and replace expression of vexpr, and can be
explicitly created or overwritten with the command vpospar.
account (Read-only) Is set to the active account.
add-file-recipients
(Boolean) When file or pipe recipients have been specified, mention them in the
corresponding address fields of the message instead of silently stripping them
from their recipient list. By default such addressees are not mentioned.
allnet (Boolean) Causes only the local part to be evaluated when comparing addresses.
append (Boolean) Causes messages saved in the secondary mailbox MBOX to be appended to
the end rather than prepended. This should always be set.
askatend (Boolean) Causes the prompts for ‘Cc:’ and ‘Bcc:’ lists to appear after the
message has been edited.
askattach
(Boolean) If set, S-nail asks an interactive user for files to attach at the end
of each message; An empty line finalizes the list.
askcc (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for carbon copy recipients
(at the end of each message if askatend or bsdcompat are set).
askbcc (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for blind carbon copy
recipients (at the end of each message if askatend or bsdcompat are set).
asksend (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for confirmation to send the
message or reenter compose mode after having been shown a preliminary envelope
summary.
asksign (Boolean)[Option] Causes the interactive user to be prompted if the message is to
be signed at the end of each message. The smime-sign variable is ignored when
this variable is set.
asksub (Boolean) Causes S-nail to prompt the interactive user for the subject upon
entering compose mode unless a subject already exists.
attrlist A sequence of characters to display in the ‘attribute’ column of the headline as
shown in the display of headers; each for one type of messages (see Message
states), with the default being ‘NUROSPMFAT+-$~’ or ‘NU *HMFAT+-$~’ if the
bsdflags variable is set, in the following order:
‘N’ new.
‘U’ unread but old.
‘R’ new but read.
‘O’ read and old.
‘S’ saved.
‘P’ preserved.
‘M’ mboxed.
‘F’ flagged.
‘A’ answered.
‘T’ draft.
‘+’ [v15 behaviour may differ] start of a (collapsed) thread in threaded
mode (see autosort, thread);
‘-’ [v15 behaviour may differ] an uncollapsed thread in threaded mode; only
used in conjunction with -L.
‘$’ classified as spam.
‘~’ classified as possible spam.
autobcc Specifies a list of recipients to which a blind carbon copy of each outgoing
message will be sent automatically.
autocc Specifies a list of recipients to which a carbon copy of each outgoing message
will be sent automatically.
autocollapse
(Boolean) Causes threads to be collapsed automatically when .Ql thread Ns ed sort
mode is entered (see the collapse command).
autoprint
(Boolean) Enable automatic typeing of a(n existing) “successive” message after
delete and undelete commands: the message that becomes the new “dot” is shown
automatically, as via dp or dt.
autosort Causes sorted mode (see the sort command) to be entered automatically with the
value of this variable as sorting method when a folder is opened, for example ‘set
autosort=thread’.
bang (Boolean) Enables the substitution of all not (reverse-solidus) escaped
exclamation mark ‘!’ characters by the contents of the last executed command for
the ! shell escape command and ~!, one of the compose mode COMMAND ESCAPES. If
this variable is not set no reverse solidus stripping is performed.
bind-timeout
[Obsolete] Predecessor of bind-inter-byte-timeout. [v15 behaviour may differ]
Setting this automatically sets the successor.
bind-inter-byte-timeout
[Option] Terminals may generate multi-byte sequences for special function keys,
for example, but these sequences may not become read as a unit. And multi-byte
sequences can be defined freely via bind. This variable specifies the timeout in
milliseconds that the MLE (see On terminal control and line editor) waits for more
bytes to arrive unless it considers a sequence “complete”. The default is 200,
the maximum is about 10 seconds. In the following example the comments state
which sequences are affected by this timeout:
? bind base abc echo 0 # abc
? bind base ab,c echo 1 # ab
? bind base abc,d echo 2 # abc
? bind base ac,d echo 3 # ac
? bind base a,b,c echo 4
? bind base a,b,c,d echo 5
? bind base a,b,cc,dd echo 6 # cc and dd
bind-inter-key-timeout
[Option] Multi-key bind sequences do not time out by default. If this variable is
set, then the current key sequence is forcefully terminated once the timeout (in
milliseconds) triggers. The value should be (maybe significantly) larger than
bind-inter-byte-timeout, but may not excess the maximum, too.
bsdcompat
(Boolean) Sets some cosmetical features to traditional BSD style; has the same
affect as setting askatend and all other variables prefixed with ‘bsd’; it also
changes the behaviour of emptystart (which does not exist in BSD).
bsdflags (Boolean) Changes the letters shown in the first column of a header summary to
traditional BSD style.
bsdheadline
(Boolean) Changes the display of columns in a header summary to traditional BSD
style.
bsdmsgs (Boolean) Changes some informational messages to traditional BSD style.
bsdorder (Boolean) Causes the ‘Subject:’ field to appear immediately after the ‘To:’ field
in message headers and with the ~h COMMAND ESCAPES.
build-cc, build-ld, build-os, build-rest
(Read-only) The build environment, including the compiler, the linker, the
operating system S-nail has been build for, usually taken from uname(1) via ‘uname
-s’, and then lowercased, as well as all the possibly interesting rest of the
configuration and build environment. This information is also available in the
verbose output of the command version.
charset-7bit
The value that should appear in the ‘charset=’ parameter of ‘Content-Type:’ MIME
header fields when no character set conversion of the message data was performed.
This defaults to US-ASCII, and the chosen character set should be US-ASCII
compatible.
charset-8bit
[Option] The default 8-bit character set that is used as an implicit last member
of the variable sendcharsets. This defaults to UTF-8 if character set conversion
capabilities are available, and to ISO-8859-1 otherwise (unless the operating
system environment is known to always and exclusively support UTF-8 locales), in
which case the only supported character set is ttycharset and this variable is
effectively ignored.
charset-unknown-8bit
[Option] RFC 1428 specifies conditions when internet mail gateways shall “upgrade”
the content of a mail message by using a character set with the name
‘unknown-8bit’. Because of the unclassified nature of this character set S-nail
will not be capable to convert this character set to any other character set. If
this variable is set any message part which uses the character set ‘unknown-8bit’
is assumed to really be in the character set given in the value, otherwise the
(final) value of charset-8bit is used for this purpose.
This variable will also be taken into account if a MIME type (see The mime.types
files) of a MIME message part that uses the ‘binary’ character set is forcefully
treated as text.
cmd The default value for the pipe command.
colour-disable
(Boolean)[Option] Forcefully disable usage of colours. Also see the section
Coloured display.
colour-pager
(Boolean)[Option] Whether colour shall be used for output that is paged through
PAGER. Note that pagers may need special command line options, for example
less(1) requires the option -R and lv(1) the option -c in order to support
colours. Often doing manual adjustments is unnecessary since S-nail may perform
adjustments dependent on the value of the environment variable PAGER (see there
for more).
contact-mail, contact-web
(Read-only) Addresses for contact per email and web, respectively, for bug
reports, suggestions, or anything else regarding S-nail. The former can be used
directly: ‘? eval mail $contact-mail’.
content-description-forwarded-message, content-description-quote-attachment,
content-description-smime-message, content-description-smime-signature
[Option](partially) Strings which will be placed in according
‘Content-Description:’ headers if non-empty. They all have default values, for
example ‘Forwarded message’.
crt In a(n interactive) terminal session, then if this valued variable is set it will
be used as a threshold to determine how many lines the given output has to span
before it will be displayed via the configured PAGER; Usage of the PAGER can be
forced by setting this to the value ‘0’, setting it without a value will deduce
the current height of the terminal screen to compute the threshold (see LINES,
screen and stty(1)). [v15 behaviour may differ] At the moment this uses the count
of lines of the message in wire format, which, dependent on the mime-encoding of
the message, is unrelated to the number of display lines. (The software is old
and historically the relation was a given thing.)
customhdr
Define a set of custom headers to be injected into newly composed or forwarded
messages. A custom header consists of the field name followed by a colon ‘:’ and
the field content body. Standard header field names cannot be overwritten by a
custom header, with the exception of ‘Comments:’ and ‘Keywords:’. Different to
the command line option -C the variable value is interpreted as a comma-separated
list of custom headers: to include commas in header bodies they need to become
escaped with reverse solidus ‘\’. Headers can be managed more freely in Compose
mode via ~^.
? set customhdr='Hdr1: Body1-1\, Body1-2, Hdr2: Body2'
datefield
Controls the appearance of the ‘%d’ date and time format specification of the
headline variable, that is used, for example, when viewing the summary of headers.
If unset, then the local receiving date is used and displayed unformatted,
otherwise the message sending ‘Date:’. It is possible to assign a strftime(3)
format string and control formatting, but embedding newlines via the ‘%n’ format
is not supported, and will result in display errors. The default is ‘%Y-%m-%d
%H:%M’, and also see datefield-markout-older.
datefield-markout-older
Only used in conjunction with datefield. Can be used to create a visible
distinction of messages dated more than a day in the future, or older than six
months, a concept comparable to the -l option of the POSIX utility ls(1). If set
to the empty string, then the plain month, day and year of the ‘Date:’ will be
displayed, but a strftime(3) format string to control formatting can be assigned.
The default is ‘%Y-%m-%d’.
debug (Boolean) (Almost) Enter a debug-only sandbox mode which generates many log
messages, disables the actual delivery of messages, and also implies norecord as
well as nosave. Also see verbose.
disposition-notification-send
(Boolean)[Option] Emit a ‘Disposition-Notification-To:’ header (RFC 3798) with the
message. This requires the from variable to be set.
dot (Boolean) When dot is set, a period ‘.’ on a line by itself during message input
in (interactive or batch -#) Compose mode will be treated as end-of-message (in
addition to the normal end-of-file condition). This behaviour is implied in posix
mode with a set ignoreeof.
dotlock-disable
(Boolean)[Option] Disable creation of dotlock files for MBOX databases.
dotlock-ignore-error
[Obsolete](Boolean)[Option] Ignore failures when creating dotlock files. Please
use dotlock-disable instead.
editalong
If this variable is set then the editor is started automatically when a message is
composed in interactive mode. If the value starts with the letter ‘v’ then this
acts as if ~v, otherwise as if ~e (see COMMAND ESCAPES) had been specified. The
editheaders variable is implied for this automatically spawned editor session.
editheaders
(Boolean) When a message is edited while being composed, its header is included in
the editable text.
emptystart
(Boolean) When entering interactive mode S-nail normally writes “No mail for user”
and exits immediately if a mailbox is empty or does not exist. If this variable
is set S-nail starts even with an empty or non-existent mailbox (the latter
behaviour furtherly depends upon bsdcompat, though).
errexit (Boolean) Let each command with a non-0 exit status, including every called macro
which returns a non-0 status, cause a program exit unless prefixed by ignerr (see
Command modifiers). This also affects COMMAND ESCAPES, but which use a different
modifier for ignoring the error. Please refer to the variable ? for more on this
topic.
errors-limit
[Option] Maximum number of entries in the errors queue.
escape The first character of this value defines the escape character for COMMAND ESCAPES
in Compose mode. The default value is the character tilde ‘~’. If set to the
empty string, command escapes are disabled.
expandaddr
If unset only user name and email address recipients are allowed On sending mail,
and non-interactive mode. If set without value all possible recipient types will
be accepted. A value is parsed as a comma-separated list of case-insensitive
strings, and if that contains ‘restrict’ behaviour equals the former except when
in interactive mode or if COMMAND ESCAPES were enabled via -~ or -#, in which case
it equals the latter, allowing all address types. ‘restrict’ really acts like
‘restrict,-all,+name,+addr’, so care for ordering issues must be taken.
Recipient types can be added and removed with a plus sign ‘+’ or hyphen-minus ‘-’
prefix, respectively. By default invalid or disallowed types are filtered out and
cause a warning, hard send errors need to be enforced by including ‘fail’. The
value ‘all’ covers all types, ‘fcc’ whitelists ‘Fcc:’ header targets regardless of
other settings, ‘file’ file targets (it includes ‘fcc’), ‘pipe’ command pipeline
targets, ‘name’ user names still unexpanded after alias and mta-aliases processing
and thus left for expansion by the mta (invalid for the built-in SMTP one), and
‘addr’ network addresses. Targets are interpreted in the given order, so that
‘restrict,fail,+file,-all,+addr’ will cause hard errors for any non-network
address recipient address unless running interactively or having been started with
the option -~ or -#; in the latter case(s) any type may be used.
User name receivers addressing valid local users can be expanded to fully
qualified network addresses (also see hostname) by including ‘nametoaddr’ in the
list. Historically invalid recipients were stripped off without causing errors,
this can be changed by making ‘failinvaddr’ an entry of the list (it really acts
like ‘failinvaddr,+addr’). Likewise, ‘domaincheck’ (really ‘domaincheck,+addr’)
compares address domain names against a whitelist and strips off (‘fail’ for hard
errors) addressees which fail this test; the domain name ‘localhost’ and the non-
empty value of hostname (the real hostname otherwise) are always whitelisted,
expandaddr-domaincheck can be set to extend this list. Finally some address
providers (for example -b, -c and all other command line recipients) will be
evaluated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see Shell-style argument
quoting) if the value list contains the string ‘shquote’.
expandaddr-domaincheck
Can be set to a comma-separated list of domain names which should be whitelisted
for the evaluation of the ‘domaincheck’ mode of expandaddr. IDNA encoding is not
automatically performed, addrcodec can be used to prepare the domain (of an
address).
expandargv
Unless this variable is set additional mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) arguments from
the command line, as can be given after a -- separator, results in a program
termination with failure status. The same can be accomplished by using the
special (case-insensitive) value ‘fail’. A lesser strict variant is the otherwise
identical ‘restrict’, which does accept such arguments in interactive mode, or if
tilde commands were enabled explicitly by using one of the command line options -~
or -#. The empty value will allow unconditional usage.
features (Read-only) String giving a list of optional features. Features are preceded with
a plus sign ‘+’ if they are available, with a hyphen-minus ‘-’ otherwise. To ease
substring matching the string starts and ends with a comma. The output of the
command version includes this information in a more pleasant output.
flipr (Boolean) This setting reverses the meanings of a set of reply commands, turning
the lowercase variants, which by default address all recipients included in the
header of a message (reply, respond, followup) into the uppercase variants, which
by default address the sender only (Reply, Respond, Followup) and vice versa.
folder The default path under which mailboxes are to be saved: filenames that begin with
the plus sign ‘+’ will have the plus sign replaced with the value of this variable
if set, otherwise the plus sign will remain unchanged when doing Filename
transformations; also see folder for more on this topic, and know about standard
imposed implications of outfolder. The value supports a subset of transformations
itself, and if the non-empty value does not start with a solidus ‘/’, then the
value of HOME will be prefixed automatically. Once the actual value is evaluated
first, the internal variable folder-resolved will be updated for caching purposes.
folder-hook-FOLDER, folder-hook
Names a defined macro which will be called whenever a folder is opened. The macro
will also be invoked when new mail arrives, but message lists for commands
executed from the macro only include newly arrived messages then. localopts are
activated by default in a folder hook, causing the covered settings to be reverted
once the folder is left again.
The specialized form will override the generic one if ‘FOLDER’ matches the file
that is opened. Unlike other folder specifications, the fully expanded name of a
folder, without metacharacters, is used to avoid ambiguities. However, if the
mailbox resides under folder then the usual ‘+’ specification is tried in
addition, so that if folder is “mail” (and thus relative to the user's home
directory) then /home/usr1/mail/sent will be tried as
‘folder-hook-/home/usr1/mail/sent’ first, but then followed by
‘folder-hook-+sent’.
folder-resolved
(Read-only) Set to the fully resolved path of folder once that evaluation has
occurred; rather internal.
followup-to
(Boolean) Controls whether a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is generated when sending
messages to known mailing lists. The user as determined via from (or, if that
contains multiple addresses, sender) will be placed in there if any list addressee
is not a subscribed list. Also see followup-to-honour and the commands mlist,
mlsubscribe, reply and Lreply.
followup-to-add-cc
(Boolean) Controls whether the user will be added to the messages' ‘Cc:’ list in
addition to placing an entry in ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ (see followup-to).
followup-to-honour
Controls whether a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is honoured when group-replying to a
message via reply or Lreply. This is a quadoption; if set without a value it
defaults to “yes”, and see followup-to.
forward-add-cc
(Boolean) Whether senders of messages forwarded via ~F, ~f, ~m, ~U or ~u shall be
made members of the carbon copies ‘Cc:’ list.
forward-as-attachment
(Boolean) Original messages are normally sent as inline text with the forward
command, and only the first part of a multipart message is included. With this
setting enabled messages are sent as unmodified MIME ‘message/rfc822’ attachments
with all of their parts included.
forward-inject-head, forward-inject-tail
The strings to put before and after the text of a message with the forward
command, respectively. The former defaults to ‘-------- Original Message
--------\n’. Special format directives in these strings will be expanded if
possible, and if so configured the output will be folded according to quote-fold;
for more please refer to quote-inject-head. Injections will not be performed by
forward if the variable forward-as-attachment is set — the COMMAND ESCAPES ~F, ~f,
~M, ~m, ~U, ~u always inject.
from The address (or a list of addresses) to put into the ‘From:’ field of the message
header, quoting RFC 5322: the author(s) of the message, that is, the mailbox(es)
of the person(s) or system(s) responsible for the writing of the message.
According to that RFC setting the sender variable is required if from contains
more than one address. [v15 behaviour may differ] Please expect automatic
management of the from and sender relationship. Dependent on the context these
addresses are handled as if they were in the list of alternates.
If a file-based MTA is used, then from (or, if that contains multiple addresses,
sender) can nonetheless be used as the envelope sender address at the MTA protocol
level (the RFC 5321 reverse-path), either via the -r command line option (without
argument; see there for more), or by setting r-option-implicit.
If the machine's hostname is not valid at the Internet (for example at a dialup
machine), then either this variable or hostname ([v15-compat] a SMTP-based mta
adds even more fine-tuning capabilities with smtp-hostname) have to be set: if so
the message and MIME part related unique ID fields ‘Message-ID:’ and ‘Content-ID:’
will be created (except when disallowed by message-id-disable or stealthmua).
fullnames
(Boolean) Due to historical reasons comments and name parts of email addresses are
removed by default when sending mail, replying to or forwarding a message. If
this variable is set such stripping is not performed.
fwdheading
[Obsolete] Predecessor of forward-inject-head.
header (Boolean) Causes the header summary to be written at startup and after commands
that affect the number of messages or the order of messages in the current folder.
Unless in posix mode a header summary will also be displayed on folder changes.
The command line option -N can be used to set noheader.
headline A format string to use for the summary of headers. Format specifiers in the given
string start with a percent sign ‘%’ and may be followed by an optional decimal
number indicating the field width — if that is negative, the field is to be left-
aligned. Names and addresses are subject to modifications according to showname
and showto. Valid format specifiers are:
‘%%’ A plain percent sign.
‘%>’ “Dotmark”: a space character but for the current message (“dot”), for
which it expands to ‘>’ (dependent on headline-plain).
‘%<’ “Dotmark”: a space character but for the current message (“dot”), for
which it expands to ‘<’ (dependent on headline-plain).
‘%$’ [Option] The spam score of the message, as has been classified via the
command spamrate. Shows only a replacement character if there is no
spam support.
‘%a’ Message attribute character (status flag); the actual content can be
adjusted by setting attrlist.
‘%d’ The date found in the ‘Date:’ header of the message when datefield is
set (the default), otherwise the date when the message was received.
Formatting can be controlled by assigning a strftime(3) format string to
datefield (and datefield-markout-older).
‘%e’ The indenting level in ‘thread’ed sort mode.
‘%f’ The address of the message sender.
‘%i’ The message thread tree structure. (Note that this format does not
support a field width, and honours headline-plain.)
‘%L’ Mailing list status: is the addressee of the message a known ‘l’ (mlist)
or ‘L’ mlsubscribed mailing list? The letter ‘P’ announces the presence
of a RFC 2369 ‘List-Post:’ header, which makes a message a valuable
target of Lreply.
‘%l’ The number of lines of the message, if available.
‘%m’ Message number.
‘%o’ The number of octets (bytes) in the message, if available.
‘%S’ Message subject (if any) in double quotes.
‘%s’ Message subject (if any).
‘%t’ The position in threaded/sorted order.
‘%U’ The value 0 except in an IMAP mailbox, where it expands to the UID of
the message.
The default is ‘%>%a%m %-18f %16d %4l/%-5o %i%-s’, or
‘%>%a%m %20-f %16d %3l/%-5o %i%-S’ if bsdcompat is set. Also see attrlist,
headline-plain and headline-bidi.
headline-bidi
Bidirectional text requires special treatment when displaying headers, because
numbers (in dates or for file sizes etc.) will not affect the current text
direction, in effect resulting in ugly line layouts when arabic or other right-to-
left text is to be displayed. On the other hand only a minority of terminals is
capable to correctly handle direction changes, so that user interaction is
necessary for acceptable results. Note that extended host system support is
required nonetheless, e.g., detection of the terminal character set is one
precondition; and this feature only works in an Unicode (i.e., UTF-8) locale.
In general setting this variable will cause S-nail to encapsulate text fields that
may occur when displaying headline (and some other fields, like dynamic expansions
in prompt) with special Unicode control sequences; it is possible to fine-tune the
terminal support level by assigning a value: no value (or any value other than
‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’) will make S-nail assume that the terminal is capable to properly
deal with Unicode version 6.3, in which case text is embedded in a pair of U+2068
(FIRST STRONG ISOLATE) and U+2069 (POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE) characters. In
addition no space on the line is reserved for these characters.
Weaker support is chosen by using the value ‘1’ (Unicode 6.3, but reserve the room
of two spaces for writing the control sequences onto the line). The values ‘2’
and ‘3’ select Unicode 1.1 support (U+200E, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK); the latter again
reserves room for two spaces in addition.
headline-plain
(Boolean) On Unicode (UTF-8) aware terminals enhanced graphical symbols are used
by default for certain entries of headline. If this variable is set only basic
US-ASCII symbols will be used.
history-file
[Option] The (expandable) location of a permanent history file for the MLE line
editor (On terminal control and line editor). Also see history-size.
history-gabby
[Option] Add more entries to the MLE history as is normally done. A comma-
separated list of case-insensitive strings can be used to fine-tune which gabby
entries shall be allowed. If it contains ‘errors’, erroneous commands will also
be added. ‘all’ adds all optional entries, and is the fallback chattiness
identifier of on-history-addition.
history-gabby-persist
(Boolean)[Option] The history-gabby entries will not be saved in persistent
storage unless this variable is set. The knowledge of whether a persistent entry
was gabby is not lost. Also see history-file.
history-size
[Option] Setting this variable imposes a limit on the number of concurrent history
entries. If set to the value 0 then no further history entries will be added, and
loading and incorporation of the history-file upon program startup can also be
suppressed by doing this. Runtime changes will not be reflected before the
history is saved or loaded (again).
hold (Boolean) This setting controls whether messages are held in the system inbox, and
it is set by default.
hostname Used instead of the value obtained from uname(3) and getaddrinfo(3) as the
hostname when expanding local addresses, for example in ‘From:’ (also see On
sending mail, and non-interactive mode, for expansion of addresses that have a
valid user-, but no domain name in angle brackets). If either of from or this
variable is set the message and MIME part related unique ID fields ‘Message-ID:’
and ‘Content-ID:’ will be created (except when disallowed by message-id-disable or
stealthmua). If the [Option]al IDNA support is available (see idna-disable)
variable assignment is aborted when a necessary conversion fails.
Setting it to the empty string will cause the normal hostname to be used, but
nonetheless enables creation of said ID fields. [v15-compat] in conjunction with
the built-in SMTP mta smtp-hostname also influences the results: one should
produce some test messages with the desired combination of hostname, and/or from,
sender etc. first.
idna-disable
(Boolean)[Option] Can be used to turn off the automatic conversion of domain names
according to the rules of IDNA (internationalized domain names for applications).
Since the IDNA code assumes that domain names are specified with the ttycharset
character set, an UTF-8 locale charset is required to represent all possible
international domain names (before conversion, that is).
ifs The input field separator that is used ([v15 behaviour may differ] by some
functions) to determine where to split input data.
1. Unsetting is treated as assigning the default value, ‘ \t\n’.
2. If set to the empty value, no field splitting will be performed.
3. If set to a non-empty value, all whitespace characters are extracted and
assigned to the variable ifs-ws.
a. ifs-ws will be ignored at the beginning and end of input. Diverging
from POSIX shells default whitespace is removed in addition, which is
owed to the entirely different line content extraction rules.
b. Each occurrence of a character of ifs will cause field-splitting, any
adjacent ifs-ws characters will be skipped.
ifs-ws (Read-only) Automatically deduced from the whitespace characters in ifs.
ignore (Boolean) Ignore interrupt signals from the terminal while entering messages;
instead echo them as ‘@’ characters and discard the current line.
ignoreeof
(Boolean) Ignore end-of-file conditions (‘control-D’) in Compose mode on message
input and in interactive command input. If set an interactive command input
session can only be left by explicitly using one of the commands exit and quit,
and message input in compose mode can only be terminated by entering a period ‘.’
on a line by itself or by using the ~. COMMAND ESCAPES; Setting this implies the
behaviour that dot describes in posix mode.
inbox If this is set to a non-empty string it will specify the user's primary system
mailbox, overriding MAIL and the system-dependent default, and (thus) be used to
replace ‘%’ when doing Filename transformations; also see folder for more on this
topic. The value supports a subset of transformations itself.
indentprefix
String used by the ~m, ~M and ~R COMMAND ESCAPES and by the quote option for
indenting messages, in place of the POSIX mandated default tabulator character
‘\t’. Also see quote-chars.
keep (Boolean) If set, an empty primary system mailbox file is not removed. Note that,
in conjunction with posix mode any empty file will be removed unless this variable
is set. This may improve the interoperability with other mail user agents when
using a common folder directory, and prevents malicious users from creating fake
mailboxes in a world-writable spool directory. [v15 behaviour may differ] Only
local regular (MBOX) files are covered, Maildir and other mailbox types will never
be removed, even if empty.
keep-content-length
(Boolean) When (editing messages and) writing MBOX mailbox files S-nail can be
told to keep the ‘Content-Length:’ and ‘Lines:’ header fields that some MUAs
generate by setting this variable. Since S-nail does neither use nor update these
non-standardized header fields (which in itself shows one of their conceptual
problems), stripping them should increase interoperability in between MUAs that
work with with same mailbox files. Note that, if this is not set but
writebackedited, as below, is, a possibly performed automatic stripping of these
header fields already marks the message as being modified. [v15 behaviour may
differ] At some future time S-nail will be capable to rewrite and apply an
mime-encoding to modified messages, and then those fields will be stripped
silently.
keepsave (Boolean) When a message is saved it is usually discarded from the originating
folder when S-nail is quit. This setting causes all saved message to be retained.
line-editor-cpl-word-breaks
[Option] List of bytes which are used by the mle-complete tabulator completion to
decide where word boundaries exist, by default ‘"'@=;|:’ [v15 behaviour may
differ] This mechanism is yet restricted.
line-editor-disable
(Boolean) Turn off any line editing capabilities (from S-nails POW, see On
terminal control and line editor for more).
line-editor-no-defaults
(Boolean)[Option] Do not establish any default key binding.
log-prefix
Error log message prefix string (‘s-nail: ’).
mailbox-display
(Read-only) The name of the current mailbox (folder), possibly abbreviated for
display purposes.
mailbox-resolved
(Read-only) The fully resolved path of the current mailbox.
mailcap-disable
(Boolean)[Option] Turn off consideration of MIME type handlers from, and implicit
loading of The Mailcap files.
mailx-extra-rc
An additional startup file that is loaded as the last of the Resource files. Use
this file for commands that are not understood by other POSIX mailx(1)
implementations, i.e., mostly anything which is not covered by Initial settings.
markanswered
(Boolean) When a message is replied to and this variable is set, it is marked as
having been answered. See the section Message states.
mbox-fcc-and-pcc
(Boolean) By default all file and pipe message receivers (see expandaddr) will be
fed valid MBOX database entry message data (see folder, mbox-rfc4155), and
existing file targets will become extended in compliance to RFC 4155. If this
variable is unset then a plain standalone RFC 5322 message will be written, and
existing file targets will be overwritten.
mbox-rfc4155
(Boolean) When opening MBOX mailbox databases, and in order to achieve
compatibility with old software, the very tolerant POSIX standard rules for
detecting message boundaries (so-called ‘From_’ lines) are used instead of the
stricter rules from the standard RFC 4155. This behaviour can be switched by
setting this variable.
This may temporarily be handy when S-nail complains about invalid ‘From_’ lines
when opening a MBOX: in this case setting this variable and re-opening the mailbox
in question may correct the result. If so, copying the entire mailbox to some
other file, as in ‘copy * SOME-FILE’, will perform proper, all-compatible ‘From_’
quoting for all detected messages, resulting in a valid MBOX mailbox. ([v15
behaviour may differ] The better and non-destructive approach is to re-encode
invalid messages, as if it would be created anew, instead of mangling the ‘From_’
lines; this requires the structural code changes of the v15 rewrite.) Finally the
variable can be unset again:
define mboxfix {
localopts yes; wysh set mbox-rfc4155;\
wysh File "${1}"; copy * "${2}"
}
call mboxfix /tmp/bad.mbox /tmp/good.mbox
memdebug (Boolean) Internal development variable. (Keeps memory debug enabled even if
debug is not set.)
message-id-disable
(Boolean) By setting this variable the generation of ‘Message-ID:’ and
‘Content-ID:’ message and MIME part headers can be completely suppressed,
effectively leaving this task up to the mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) or the SMTP
server. Note that according to RFC 5321 a SMTP server is not required to add this
field by itself, so it should be ensured that it accepts messages without
‘Message-ID’.
message-inject-head
A string to put at the beginning of each new message, followed by a newline.
[Obsolete] The escape sequences tabulator ‘\t’ and newline ‘\n’ are understood
(use the wysh prefix when setting the variable(s) instead).
message-inject-tail
A string to put at the end of each new message, followed by a newline. [Obsolete]
The escape sequences tabulator ‘\t’ and newline ‘\n’ are understood (use the wysh
prefix when setting the variable(s) instead). Also see on-compose-leave.
metoo (Boolean) Usually, when an alias expansion contains the sender, the sender is
removed from the expansion. Setting this option suppresses these removals. Note
that a set metoo also causes a ‘-m’ option to be passed through to the mta (Mail-
Transfer-Agent); though most of the modern MTAs no longer document this flag, no
MTA is known which does not support it (for historical compatibility).
mime-allow-text-controls
(Boolean) When sending messages, each part of the message is MIME-inspected in
order to classify the ‘Content-Type:’ and ‘Content-Transfer-Encoding:’ (see
mime-encoding) that is required to send this part over mail transport, i.e., a
computation rather similar to what the file(1) command produces when used with the
‘--mime’ option.
This classification however treats text files which are encoded in UTF-16 (seen
for HTML files) and similar character sets as binary octet-streams, forcefully
changing any ‘text/plain’ or ‘text/html’ specification to
‘application/octet-stream’: If that actually happens a yet unset charset MIME
parameter is set to ‘binary’, effectively making it impossible for the receiving
MUA to automatically interpret the contents of the part.
If this variable is set, and the data was unambiguously identified as text data at
first glance (by a ‘.txt’ or ‘.html’ file extension), then the original
‘Content-Type:’ will not be overwritten.
mime-alternative-favour-rich
(Boolean) If this variable is set then rich MIME alternative parts (e.g., HTML)
will be preferred in favour of included plain text versions when displaying
messages, provided that a handler exists which produces output that can be
(re)integrated into S-nail's normal visual display.
mime-counter-evidence
Normally the ‘Content-Type:’ field is used to decide how to handle MIME parts.
Some MUAs, however, do not use The mime.types files (also see HTML mail and MIME
attachments) or a similar mechanism to correctly classify content, but specify an
unspecific MIME type (‘application/octet-stream’) even for plain text attachments.
If this variable is set then S-nail will try to re-classify such MIME message
parts, if possible, for example via a possibly existing attachment filename. A
non-empty value may also be given, in which case a number is expected, actually a
carrier of bits, best specified as a binary value, like ‘0b1111’.
• If bit two is set (counting from 1, decimal 2) then the detected mimetype will
be carried along with the message and be used for deciding which MIME handler
is to be used, for example; when displaying such a MIME part the part-info
will indicate the overridden content-type by showing a plus sign ‘+’.
• If bit three is set (decimal 4) then the counter-evidence is always produced
and a positive result will be used as the MIME type, even forcefully
overriding the parts given MIME type.
• If bit four is set (decimal 8) as a last resort the actual content of
‘application/octet-stream’ parts will be inspected, so that data which looks
like plain text can be treated as such. This mode is even more relaxed when
data is to be displayed to the user or used as a message quote (data consumers
which mangle data for display purposes, which includes masking of control
characters, for example).
mime-encoding
The MIME ‘Content-Transfer-Encoding’ to use in outgoing text messages and message
parts, where applicable (7-bit clean text messages are without an encoding if
possible):
‘8bit’ (Or ‘8b’.) 8-bit transport effectively causes the raw data be passed
through unchanged, but may cause problems when transferring mail
messages over channels that are not ESMTP (RFC 1869) compliant. Also,
several input data constructs are not allowed by the specifications and
may cause a different transfer-encoding to be used. By established
rules and popular demand occurrences of ‘^From_’ (see mbox-rfc4155) will
be MBOXO quoted (prefixed with greater-than sign ‘>’) instead of causing
a non-destructive encoding like ‘quoted-printable’ to be chosen, unless
context (like message signing) requires otherwise.
‘quoted-printable’
(Or ‘qp’.) Quoted-printable encoding is 7-bit clean and has the
property that ASCII characters are passed through unchanged, so that an
english message can be read as-is; it is also acceptable for other
single-byte locales that share many characters with ASCII, for example
ISO-8859-1. The encoding will cause a large overhead for messages in
other character sets: for example it will require up to twelve (12)
bytes to encode a single UTF-8 character of four (4) bytes. It is the
default encoding.
‘base64’ (Or ‘b64’.) This encoding is 7-bit clean and will always be used for
binary data. This encoding has a constant input:output ratio of 3:4,
regardless of the character set of the input data it will encode three
bytes of input to four bytes of output. This transfer-encoding is not
human readable without performing a decoding step.
mime-force-sendout
(Boolean)[Option] Whenever it is not acceptable to fail sending out messages
because of non-convertible character content this variable may be set. It will,
as a last resort, classify the part content as ‘application/octet-stream’. Please
refer to the section Character sets for the complete picture of character set
conversion, and HTML mail and MIME attachments for how to internally or externally
handle part content.
mimetypes-load-control
Can be used to control which of The mime.types files are loaded: if the letter ‘u’
is part of the option value, then the user's personal ~/.mime.types file will be
loaded (if it exists); likewise the letter ‘s’ controls loading of the system wide
/etc/mime.types; directives found in the user file take precedence, letter
matching is case-insensitive. If this variable is not set S-nail will try to load
both files. Incorporation of the S-nail-built-in MIME types cannot be suppressed,
but they will be matched last (the order can be listed via mimetype).
More sources can be specified by using a different syntax: if the value string
contains an equals sign ‘=’ then it is instead parsed as a comma-separated list of
the described letters plus ‘f=FILENAME’ pairs; the given filenames will be
expanded and loaded, and their content may use the extended syntax that is
described in the section The mime.types files. Directives found in such files
always take precedence (are prepended to the MIME type cache).
mta Select an alternate Mail-Transfer-Agent by either specifying the full pathname of
an executable (a ‘file://’ prefix may be given), or [Option]ally a SMTP aka
SUBMISSION protocol URL [v15-compat]:
submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port]
([no v15-compat]: ‘[smtp://]server[:port]’.) The default has been chosen at
compile time. MTA data transfers are always performed in asynchronous child
processes, and without supervision unless either the sendwait or the verbose
variable is set. Also see mta-bcc-ok. [Option]ally expansion of aliases(5) can
be performed by setting mta-aliases.
For testing purposes there is the ‘test’ pseudo-MTA, which dumps to standard
output or optionally to a file, and honours mbox-fcc-and-pcc:
$ echo text | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s ubject ex@am.ple
$ </dev/null s-nail -:/ -Smta=test://./xy ex@am.ple
For a file-based MTA it may be necessary to set mta-argv0 in in order to choose
the right target of a modern mailwrapper(8) environment. It will be passed
command line arguments from several possible sources: from the variable
mta-arguments if set, from the command line if given and the variable expandargv
allows their use. Argument processing of the MTA will be terminated with a --
separator.
The otherwise occurring implicit usage of the following MTA command line arguments
can be disabled by setting the boolean variable mta-no-default-arguments (which
will also disable passing -- to the MTA): -i (for not treating a line with only a
dot ‘.’ character as the end of input), -m (shall the variable metoo be set) and
-v (if the verbose variable is set); in conjunction with the -r command line
option or r-option-implicit -f as well as possibly -F will (not) be passed.
[Option]ally S-nail can send mail over SMTP aka SUBMISSION network connections to
a single defined smart host by setting this variable to a SMTP or SUBMISSION URL
(see On URL syntax and credential lookup). An authentication scheme can be
specified via the variable chain smtp-auth. Encrypted network connections are
[Option]ally available, the section Encrypted network communication should give an
overview and provide links to more information on this. Note that with some mail
providers it may be necessary to set the smtp-hostname variable in order to use a
specific combination of from, hostname and mta. Network communication socket
timeouts are configurable via socket-connect-timeout. All generated network
traffic may be proxied over a SOCKS socks-proxy, it can be logged by setting
verbose twice. The following SMTP variants may be used:
• The plain SMTP protocol (RFC 5321) that normally lives on the server port 25
and requires setting the smtp-use-starttls variable to enter a TLS encrypted
session state. Assign a value like [v15-compat]
‘smtp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’ ([no v15-compat]
‘smtp://server[:port]’) to choose this protocol.
• The so-called SMTPS which is supposed to live on server port 465 and is
automatically TLS secured. Unfortunately it never became a standardized
protocol and may thus not be supported by your hosts network service database
– in fact the port number has already been reassigned to other protocols!
SMTPS is nonetheless a commonly offered protocol and thus can be chosen by
assigning a value like [v15-compat] ‘smtps://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’
([no v15-compat] ‘smtps://server[:port]’); due to the mentioned problems it is
usually necessary to explicitly specify the port as ‘:465’, however.
• The SUBMISSION protocol (RFC 6409) lives on server port 587 and is identically
to the SMTP protocol from S-nail's point of view; it requires setting
smtp-use-starttls to enter a TLS secured session state; e.g., [v15-compat]
‘submission://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’.
• The SUBMISSIONS protocol (RFC 8314) that lives on server port 465 and is TLS
secured by default. It can be chosen by assigning a value like [v15-compat]
‘submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’. Due to the problems
mentioned for SMTPS above and the fact that SUBMISSIONS is new and a successor
that lives on the same port as the historical engineering mismanagement named
SMTPS, it is usually necessary to explicitly specify the port as ‘:465’.
mta-aliases
[Option] If set to a path pointing to a text file in valid MTA (Postfix)
aliases(5) format, the file is loaded and cached (manageable with mtaaliases), and
henceforth plain ‘name’ (see expandaddr) message receiver names are recursively
expanded as a last expansion step, after the distribution lists which can be
created with alias. Constraints on aliases(5) content support: only local
addresses (names) which are valid usernames (‘[a-z_][a-z0-9_-]*[$]?’) are treated
as expandable aliases, and [v15 behaviour may differ] ‘:include:/file/name’
directives are not supported. By including ‘-name’ in expandaddr it can be
asserted that only expanded names (mail addresses) are passed through to the MTA.
mta-arguments
Arguments to pass through to a file-based mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent), parsed
according to Shell-style argument quoting into an array of arguments which will be
joined onto MTA options from other sources, for example ‘? wysh set
mta-arguments='-t -X "/tmp/my log"'’.
mta-no-default-arguments
(Boolean) Avoids passing standard command line options to a file-based mta (please
see there).
mta-no-receiver-arguments
(Boolean) By default all receiver addresses will be passed as command line options
to a file-based mta. Setting this variable disables this behaviour to aid those
MTAs which employ special treatment of such arguments. Doing so can make it
necessary to pass a -t via mta-arguments, to testify the MTA that it should use
the passed message as a template.
mta-argv0
Many systems use a so-called mailwrapper(8) environment to ensure compatibility
with sendmail(1). This works by inspecting the name that was used to invoke the
mail delivery system. If this variable is set then the mailwrapper (the program
that is actually executed when calling the file-based mta) will treat its contents
as that name.
mta-bcc-ok
(Boolean) In violation of RFC 5322 some MTAs do not remove ‘Bcc:’ header lines
from transported messages after having noted the respective receivers for
addressing purposes. (The MTAs Exim and Courier for example require the command
line option -t to enforce removal.) Unless this is set corresponding receivers
are addressed by protocol-specific means or MTA command line options only, the
header itself is stripped before being sent over the wire.
netrc-lookup-USER@HOST, netrc-lookup-HOST, netrc-lookup
(Boolean)[v15-compat][Option] Used to control usage of the user's ~/.netrc file
for lookup of account credentials, as documented in the section On URL syntax and
credential lookup and for the command netrc; the section The .netrc file documents
the file format. Also see netrc-pipe.
netrc-pipe
[v15-compat][Option] When ~/.netrc is loaded (see netrc and netrc-lookup) then
S-nail will read the output of a shell pipe instead of the user's ~/.netrc file if
this variable is set (to the desired shell command). This can be used to, for
example, store ~/.netrc in encrypted form: ‘? set netrc-pipe='gpg -qd
~/.netrc.pgp'’.
newfolders
[Option] If this variable has the value ‘maildir’, newly created local folders
will be in Maildir instead of MBOX format.
newmail Checks for new mail in the current folder each time the prompt is shown. A
Maildir folder must be re-scanned to determine if new mail has arrived. If this
variable is set to the special value ‘nopoll’ then a Maildir folder will not be
rescanned completely, but only timestamp changes are detected. Maildir folders
are [Option]al.
outfolder
(Boolean) Causes a non-absolute filename specified in record, as well as the
sender-based filenames of the Copy, Save, Followup and followup commands to be
interpreted relative to the folder directory rather than relative to the current
directory.
on-account-cleanup-ACCOUNT, on-account-cleanup
Macro hook which will be called once an account is left, as the very last step
before unrolling per-account localopts. This hook is run even in case of fatal
errors, including those generated by switching to the account as such, and it is
advisable to perform only absolutely necessary actions, like cleaning up
alternates, for example. The specialized form is used in favour of the generic
one if found.
on-compose-cleanup
Macro hook which will be called after the message has been sent (or not, in case
of failures), as the very last step before unrolling compose mode localopts. This
hook is run even in case of fatal errors, and it is advisable to perform only
absolutely necessary actions, like cleaning up alternates, for example.
For compose mode hooks that may affect the message content please see
on-compose-enter, on-compose-leave, on-compose-splice. [v15 behaviour may differ]
This hook exists because alias, alternates, commandalias, shortcut, to name a few,
are neither covered by localopts nor by local: changes applied in compose mode
will continue to be in effect thereafter.
on-compose-enter, on-compose-leave
Macro hooks which will be called once compose mode is entered, and after composing
has been finished, respectively; the exact order of the steps taken is documented
for ~., one of the COMMAND ESCAPES. Context about the message being worked on can
be queried via digmsg. localopts are enabled for these hooks, and changes on
variables will be forgotten after the message has been sent. on-compose-cleanup
can be used to perform other necessary cleanup steps.
Here is an example that injects a signature via message-inject-tail; instead using
on-compose-splice to simply inject the file of desire via ~< or ~<! may be a
better approach.
define t_ocl {
vput ! i cat ~/.mysig
if $? -eq 0
vput csop message-inject-tail trim-end $i
end
# Alternatively
readctl create ~/.mysig
if $? -eq 0
readall i
if $? -eq 0
vput csop message-inject-tail trim-end $i
end
readctl remove ~/.mysig
end
}
set on-compose-leave=t_ocl
on-compose-splice, on-compose-splice-shell
These hooks run once the normal compose mode is finished, but before the
on-compose-leave macro hook is called etc. Both hooks will be executed in a
subprocess, with their input and output connected to S-nail such that they can act
as if they would be an interactive user. The difference in between them is that
the latter is a SHELL command, whereas the former is a normal defined macro, but
which is restricted to a small set of commands (the verbose output of for example
list will indicate said capability). localopts are enabled for these hooks (in
the parent process), causing any setting to be forgotten after the message has
been sent; on-compose-cleanup can be used to perform other cleanup as necessary.
During execution of these hooks S-nail will temporarily forget whether it has been
started in interactive mode, (a restricted set of) COMMAND ESCAPES will always be
available, and for guaranteed reproducibilities sake escape and ifs will be set to
their defaults. The compose mode command ~^ has been especially designed for
scriptability (via these hooks). The first line the hook will read on its
standard input is the protocol version of said command escape, currently “0 0 2”:
backward incompatible protocol changes have to be expected.
Care must be taken to avoid deadlocks and other false control flow: if both
involved processes wait for more input to happen at the same time, or one does not
expect more input but the other is stuck waiting for consumption of its output,
etc. There is no automatic synchronization of the hook: it will not be stopped
automatically just because it, e.g., emits ‘~x’. The hooks will however receive a
termination signal if the parent enters an error condition. [v15 behaviour may
differ] Protection against and interaction with signals is not yet given; it is
likely that in the future these scripts will be placed in an isolated session,
which is signalled in its entirety as necessary.
define ocs_signature {
read version
echo '~< ~/.mysig' # '~<! fortune pathtofortunefile'
}
set on-compose-splice=ocs_signature
wysh set on-compose-splice-shell=$'\
read version;\
printf "hello $version! Headers: ";\
echo \'~^header list\';\
read status result;\
echo "status=$status result=$result";\
'
define ocsm {
read version
echo Splice protocol version is $version
echo '~^h l'; read hl; vput csop es subs "${hl}" 0 1
if "$es" != 2
echoerr 'Cannot read header list'; echo '~x'; xit
endif
if "$hl" !%?case ' cc'
echo '~^h i cc "Diet is your <mirr.or>"'; read es;\
vput csop es substring "${es}" 0 1
if "$es" != 2
echoerr 'Cannot insert Cc: header'; echo '~x'
# (no xit, macro finishes anyway)
endif
endif
}
set on-compose-splice=ocsm
on-history-addition
This hook will be called if an entry is about to be added to the history of the
MLE, as documented in On terminal control and line editor. It will be called with
three arguments: the first is the name of the input context (see bind), the second
is either an empty string or the matching history-gabby type, and the third being
the complete command line to be added. The entry will not be added to history if
the hook uses a non-0 return. [v15 behaviour may differ] A future version will
give the expanded command name as the third argument, followed by the tokenized
command line as parsed in the remaining arguments, the first of which is the
original unexpanded command name; i.e., one may do ‘shift 4’ and will then be able
to access the positional parameters as usual via *, #, 1 etc.
on-main-loop-tick
This hook will be called whenever the program's main event loop is about to read
the next input line. Note variable and other changes it performs are not scoped
as via localopts!
on-program-exit
This hook will be called when the program exits, whether via exit or quit, or
because the send mode is done. Note: this runs late and so terminal settings etc.
are already teared down.
on-resend-cleanup
[v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to on-compose-cleanup, but is only triggered
by resend.
on-resend-enter
[v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to on-compose-enter, but is only triggered by
resend; currently there is no digmsg support, for example.
page (Boolean) If set, each message feed through the command given for pipe is followed
by a formfeed character ‘\f’.
password-USER@HOST, password-HOST, password
[v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a password, which is used in case none has
been given in the protocol and account-specific URL; as a last resort S-nail will
ask for a password on the user's terminal if the authentication method requires a
password. Specifying passwords in a startup file is generally a security risk;
the file should be readable by the invoking user only.
password-USER@HOST
[no v15-compat] (see the chain above for [v15-compat]) Set the password for ‘USER’
when connecting to ‘HOST’. If no such variable is defined for a host, the user
will be asked for a password on standard input. Specifying passwords in a startup
file is generally a security risk; the file should be readable by the invoking
user only.
piperaw (Boolean) Send messages to the pipe command without performing MIME and character
set conversions.
pipe-EXTENSION
Identical to pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE except that ‘EXTENSION’ (normalized to lowercase
using character mappings of the ASCII charset) denotes a file extension, for
example ‘xhtml’. Handlers registered using this method take precedence.
pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE
A MIME message part identified as ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’ (case-insensitive, normalized to
lowercase using character mappings of the ASCII charset) is displayed or quoted,
its text is filtered through the value of this variable interpreted as a shell
command. Unless noted only parts displayable as inline plain text (see
copiousoutput) are covered, other MIME parts will only be considered by and for
mimeview.
The special value question mark ‘?’ forces interpretation of the message part as
plain text, for example ‘set pipe-application/xml=?’. (This can also be achieved
by adding a MIME type-marker via mimetype.) [Option]ally MIME type handlers may
be defined via The Mailcap files to which should be referred to for documentation
of flags like copiousoutput. Question mark is indeed a trigger character to
indicate flags that adjust behaviour and usage of the rest of the value, the shell
command, for example:
? set pipe-X/Y='?!++=? vim ${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}'
‘*’ The command output can be reintegrated into this MUA's normal
processing: copiousoutput. Implied when using a plain ‘’.
‘#’ Only use this handler for display, not for quoting a message:
x-mailx-noquote.
‘&’ Run the command asynchronously, do not wait for the handler to exit:
x-mailx-async. The standard output of the command will go to /dev/null.
‘!’ The command must be run on an interactive terminal, the terminal will
temporarily be released for it to run: needsterminal.
‘+’ Request creation of a zero-sized temporary file, the absolute pathname
of which will be made accessible via the environment variable
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY: x-mailx-tmpfile. If given twice then the file
will be unlinked automatically by S-nail when the command loop is
entered again at latest: x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink; it is an error to use
automatic deletion in conjunction with x-mailx-async.
‘=’ Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard
input; with this the data will instead be written into
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY (x-mailx-tmpfile-fill), the creation of which
is implied; in order to cause automatic deletion of the temporary file
two plus signs ‘++’ still have to be used.
‘t’ Text type-marker: display this as normal plain text (for type-markers:
The mime.types files). Identical to only giving plain ‘?’, implies
copiousoutput.
‘h’ [Option] HTML type-marker: display via built-in HTML-to-text filter.
Implies copiousoutput.
‘?’ To avoid ambiguities with normal shell command content another question
mark can be used to forcefully terminate interpretation of remaining
characters. (Any character not in this list will have the same effect.)
Some information about the MIME part to be displayed is embedded into the
environment of the shell command:
MAILX_CONTENT The MIME content-type of the part, if known, the empty
string otherwise.
MAILX_CONTENT_EVIDENCE If mime-counter-evidence includes the carry-around-bit
(2), then this will be set to the detected MIME content-
type; not only then identical to MAILX_CONTENT otherwise.
MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL MIME parts of type ‘message/external-body
access-type=url’ will store the access URL in this
variable, it is empty otherwise. URL targets should not
be activated automatically, without supervision.
MAILX_FILENAME The filename, if any is set, the empty string otherwise.
MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED
A random string.
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY
If temporary file creation has been requested through the
command prefix this variable will be set and contain the
absolute pathname of the temporary file.
pop3-auth-USER@HOST, pop3-auth-HOST, pop3-auth
[Option][v15-compat] Variable chain that sets the POP3 authentication method.
Supported are the default ‘plain’, [v15-compat] ‘oauthbearer’ (see FAQ entry But,
how about XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?), as well as [v15-compat] ‘external’ and
‘externanon’ for TLS secured connections which pass a client certificate via
tls-config-pairs. There may be the [Option]al method [v15-compat] ‘gssapi’.
‘externanon’ does not need any user credentials, ‘external’ and ‘gssapi’ need a
user, the remains also require a password. ‘externanon’ solely builds upon the
credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go since
tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422, and fail if additional credentials
are actually passed. Unless pop3-no-apop is set the ‘plain’ method will
[Option]ally be replaced with APOP if possible (see there).
pop3-bulk-load-USER@HOST, pop3-bulk-load-HOST, pop3-bulk-load
(Boolean)[Option] When accessing a POP3 server S-nail loads the headers of the
messages, and only requests the message bodies on user request. For the POP3
protocol this means that the message headers will be downloaded twice. If this
variable is set then S-nail will download only complete messages from the given
POP3 server(s) instead.
pop3-keepalive-USER@HOST, pop3-keepalive-HOST, pop3-keepalive
[Option] POP3 servers close the connection after a period of inactivity; the
standard requires this to be at least 10 minutes, but practical experience may
vary. Setting this variable to a numeric value greater than ‘0’ causes a ‘NOOP’
command to be sent each value seconds if no other operation is performed.
pop3-no-apop-USER@HOST, pop3-no-apop-HOST, pop3-no-apop
(Boolean)[Option] Unless this variable is set the MD5 based ‘APOP’ authentication
method will be used instead of a chosen ‘plain’ pop3-auth when connecting to a
POP3 server that advertises support. The advantage of ‘APOP’ is that only a
single packet is sent for the user/password tuple. (Originally also that the
password is not sent in clear text over the wire, but for one MD5 does not any
longer offer sufficient security, and then today transport is almost ever TLS
secured.) Note that pop3-no-apop-HOST requires [v15-compat].
pop3-use-starttls-USER@HOST, pop3-use-starttls-HOST, pop3-use-starttls
(Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to issue a ‘STLS’ command to make an unencrypted
POP3 session TLS encrypted. This functionality is not supported by all servers,
and is not used if the session is already encrypted by the POP3S method. Note
that pop3-use-starttls-HOST requires [v15-compat].
posix (Boolean) This flag enables POSIX mode, which changes behaviour of S-nail where
that deviates from standardized behaviour. It is automatically squared with the
environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT, changing the one will adjust the other. The
following behaviour is covered and enforced by this mechanism:
• In non-interactive mode, any error encountered while loading resource files
during program startup will cause a program exit, whereas in interactive mode
such errors will stop loading of the currently loaded (stack of) file(s, i.e.,
recursively). These exits can be circumvented on a per-command base by using
ignerr, one of the Command modifiers, for each command which shall be allowed
to fail.
• alternates will replace the list of alternate addresses instead of appending
to it. In addition alternates will only be honoured for any sort of message
reply, and for aliases.
• The variable inserting COMMAND ESCAPES ~A, ~a, ~I and ~i will expand embedded
character sequences ‘\t’ horizontal tabulator and ‘\n’ line feed. [v15
behaviour may differ] For compatibility reasons this step will always be
performed.
• Reading in messages via ~f (COMMAND ESCAPES) will use the ‘type’ not the
‘forward’ headerpick selection.
• Upon changing the active folder no summary of headers will be displayed even
if header is set.
• Setting ignoreeof implies the behaviour described by dot.
• The variable keep is extended to cover any empty mailbox, not only empty
primary system mailboxes: they will be removed when they are left in empty
state otherwise.
• Each command has an exit ? and error ! status that overwrites that of the last
command. In POSIX mode the program exit status will signal failure regardless
unless all messages were successfully sent out to the mta; also see sendwait.
print-alternatives
(Boolean) When a MIME message part of type ‘multipart/alternative’ is displayed
and it contains a subpart of type ‘text/plain’, other parts are normally
discarded. Setting this variable causes all subparts to be displayed, just as if
the surrounding part was of type ‘multipart/mixed’.
prompt The string used as a prompt in interactive mode. Whenever the variable is
evaluated the value is treated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see
Shell-style argument quoting). This (post-assignment, i.e., second) expansion can
be used to embed status information, for example ?, !, account or mailbox-display.
In order to embed characters which should not be counted when calculating the
visual width of the resulting string, enclose the characters of interest in a pair
of reverse solidus escaped brackets: ‘\[\E[0m\]’; a slot for coloured prompts is
also available with the [Option]al command colour. Prompting may be prevented by
setting this to the null string (aka ‘set noprompt’).
prompt2 This string is used for secondary prompts, but is otherwise identical to prompt.
The default is ‘.. ’.
quiet (Boolean) Suppresses the printing of the version when first invoked.
quote If set messages processed by variants of followup and reply will start with the
original message, lines of which prefixed by indentprefix, taking into account
quote-chars and quote-fold. No headers will be quoted when set without value or
for ‘noheading’, for ‘headers’ the ‘type’ headerpick selection will be included in
the quote, ‘allbodies’ embeds the (body) contents of all MIME parts, and
‘allheaders’ also includes all headers. The quoted message will be enclosed by
the expansions of quote-inject-head and quote-inject-tail. Also see quote-add-cc,
quote-as-attachment and ~Q, one of the COMMAND ESCAPES.
quote-add-cc
(Boolean) Whether senders of messages quoted via ~Q shall be made members of the
carbon copies ‘Cc:’ list.
quote-as-attachment
(Boolean) Add the original message in its entirety as a ‘message/rfc822’ MIME
attachment when replying to a message. Note this works regardless of the setting
of quote.
quote-chars
Can be set to a string consisting of non-whitespace ASCII characters which shall
be treated as quotation leaders, the default being ‘>|}:’.
quote-fold
[Option] Can be set in addition to indentprefix, and creates a more fancy
quotation in that leading quotation characters (quote-chars) are compressed and
overlong lines are folded. quote-fold can be set to either one, two or three
(space separated) numeric values, which are interpreted as the maximum (goal) and
the minimum line length, respectively, in a spirit rather equal to the fmt(1)
program, but line- instead of paragraph-based. The third value is used as the
maximum line length instead of the first if no better break point can be found; it
is ignored unless it is larger than the minimum and smaller than the maximum. If
not set explicitly the minimum will reflect the goal algorithmically. The goal
cannot be smaller than the length of indentprefix plus some additional pad;
necessary adjustments take place silently.
quote-inject-head, quote-inject-tail
The strings to put before and after the text of a quoted message, if non-empty,
and respectively. The former defaults to ‘%f wrote:\n\n’. Special format
directives will be expanded if possible, and if so configured the output will be
folded according to quote-fold. Format specifiers in the given strings start with
a percent sign ‘%’ and expand values of the original message, unless noted
otherwise. Note that names and addresses are not subject to the setting of
showto. Valid format specifiers are:
‘%%’ A plain percent sign.
‘%a’ The address(es) of the sender(s).
‘%d’ The date found in the ‘Date:’ header of the message when datefield is
set (the default), otherwise the date when the message was received.
Formatting can be controlled by assigning a strftime(3) format string to
datefield (and datefield-markout-older).
‘%f’ The full name(s) (name and address, as given) of the sender(s).
‘%i’ The ‘Message-ID:’.
‘%n’ The real name(s) of the sender(s) if there is one and showname allows
usage, the address(es) otherwise.
‘%r’ The senders real name(s) if there is one, the address(es) otherwise.
r-option-implicit
(Boolean) Setting this option evaluates the contents of from (or, if that contains
multiple addresses, sender) and passes the results onto the used (file-based) MTA
as described for the -r option (empty argument case).
recipients-in-cc
(Boolean) When doing a reply, the original ‘From:’ and ‘To:’ as well as addressees
which possibly came in via ‘Reply-To:’ and ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ are by default
merged into the new ‘To:’. If this variable is set a sensitive algorithm tries to
place in ‘To:’ only the sender of the message being replied to, others are placed
in ‘Cc:’.
record Unless this variable is defined, no copies of outgoing mail will be saved. If
defined it gives the pathname, subject to the usual Filename transformations, of a
folder where all new, replied-to or forwarded messages are saved: when saving to
this folder fails the message is not sent, but instead saved to DEAD. The
standard defines that relative (fully expanded) paths are to be interpreted
relative to the current directory (cwd), to force interpretation relative to
folder outfolder needs to be set in addition.
record-files
(Boolean) If this variable is set the meaning of record will be extended to cover
messages which target only file and pipe recipients (see expandaddr). These
address types will not appear in recipient lists unless add-file-recipients is
also set.
record-resent
(Boolean) If this variable is set the meaning of record will be extended to also
cover the resend and Resend commands.
reply-in-same-charset
(Boolean) If this variable is set S-nail first tries to use the same character set
of the original message for replies. If this fails, the mechanism described in
Character sets is evaluated as usual.
reply-strings
Can be set to a comma-separated list of (case-insensitive according to ASCII
rules) strings which shall be recognized in addition to the built-in strings as
‘Subject:’ reply message indicators – built-in are ‘Re:’, which is mandated by RFC
5322, as well as the german ‘Aw:’, ‘Antw:’, and the ‘Wg:’ which often has been
seen in the wild; I.e., the separating colon has to be specified explicitly.
reply-to A list of addresses to put into the ‘Reply-To:’ field of the message header.
Members of this list are handled as if they were in the alternates list.
replyto [Obsolete] Variant of reply-to.
reply-to-honour
Controls whether a ‘Reply-To:’ header is honoured when replying to a message via
reply or Lreply. This is a quadoption; if set without a value it defaults to
“yes”.
reply-to-swap-in
Standards like DKIM and (in conjunction with) DMARC caused many Mailing lists to
use sender address rewriting in the style of ‘Name via List <list@address>’, where
the original sender address often being placed in ‘Reply-To:’. If this is set and
a ‘Reply-To:’ exists, and consists of only one addressee (!), then that is used in
place of the pretended sender. This works independently from reply-to-honour.
The optional value, a comma-separated list of strings, offers more fine-grained
control on when swapping shall be used; for now supported is mlist, here swapping
occurs if the sender is a mailing-list as defined by mlist.
rfc822-body-from_
(Boolean) This variable can be used to force displaying a so-called ‘From_’ line
for messages that are embedded into an envelope mail via the ‘message/rfc822’ MIME
mechanism, for more visual convenience, also see mbox-rfc4155.
save (Boolean) Enable saving of (partial) messages in DEAD upon interrupt or delivery
error.
screen The number of lines that represents a “screenful” of lines, used in headers
summary display, from searching, message topline display and scrolling via z. If
this variable is not set S-nail falls back to a calculation based upon the
detected terminal window size and the baud rate: the faster the terminal, the more
will be shown. Overall screen dimensions and pager usage is influenced by the
environment variables COLUMNS and LINES and the variable crt.
searchheaders
(Boolean) Expand message list specifiers in the form ‘/x:y’ to all messages
containing the substring “y” in the header field ‘x’. The string search is case
insensitive.
sendcharsets
[Option] A comma-separated list of character set names that can be used in
outgoing internet mail. The value of the variable charset-8bit is automatically
appended to this list of character sets. If no character set conversion
capabilities are compiled into S-nail then the only supported charset is
ttycharset. Also see sendcharsets-else-ttycharset and refer to the section
Character sets for the complete picture of character set conversion in S-nail.
sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
(Boolean)[Option] If this variable is set, but sendcharsets is not, then S-nail
acts as if sendcharsets had been set to the value of the variable ttycharset. In
effect this combination passes through the message data in the character set of
the current locale encoding: therefore mail message text will be (assumed to be)
in ISO-8859-1 encoding when send from within a ISO-8859-1 locale, and in UTF-8
encoding when send from within an UTF-8 locale.
The 8-bit fallback charset-8bit never comes into play as ttycharset is implicitly
assumed to be 8-bit and capable to represent all files the user may specify (as is
the case when no character set conversion support is available in S-nail and the
only supported character set is ttycharset, see Character sets). This might be a
problem for scripts which use the suggested ‘LC_ALL=C’ setting, since in this case
the character set is US-ASCII by definition, so that it is better to also override
ttycharset, then; and/or do something like the following in the resource file:
# Avoid ASCII "propagates to 8-bit" when scripting
\if ! t && "$LC_ALL" != C && "$LC_CTYPE" != C
\set sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
\end
sender An address that is put into the ‘Sender:’ field of outgoing messages, quoting RFC
5322: the mailbox of the agent responsible for the actual transmission of the
message. This field should normally not be used unless the from field contains
more than one address, on which case it is required. [v15 behaviour may differ]
Please expect automatic management of the from and sender relationship. Dependent
on the context this address is handled as if it were in the list of alternates.
Also see -r, r-option-implicit.
sendmail [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta.
sendmail-arguments
[Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-arguments.
sendmail-no-default-arguments
[Obsolete](Boolean) Predecessor of mta-no-default-arguments.
sendmail-progname
[Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-argv0.
sendwait Sending messages to the chosen mta or to command-pipe receivers (see On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode) will be performed asynchronously. This means that
only startup errors of the respective program will be recognizable, but no
delivery errors. Also, no guarantees can be made as to when the respective
program will actually run, as well as to when they will have produced output.
If this variable is set then child program exit is waited for, and its exit status
code is used to decide about success. Remarks: in conflict with the POSIX
standard this variable is built-in to be initially set. Another difference is
that it can have a value, which is interpreted as a comma-separated list of case-
insensitive strings naming specific subsystems for which synchronousness shall be
ensured (only). Possible values are ‘mta’ for mta delivery, and ‘pcc’ for
command-pipe receivers.
showlast (Boolean) This setting causes S-nail to start at the last message instead of the
first one when opening a mail folder, as well as with from and headers.
showname (Boolean) Causes S-nail to use the sender's real name instead of the plain address
in the header field summary and in message specifications.
showto (Boolean) Causes the recipient of the message to be shown in the header summary if
the message was sent by the user.
Sign The value backing ~A, one of the COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see message-inject-tail,
on-compose-leave and on-compose-splice.
sign The value backing ~a, one of the COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see message-inject-tail,
on-compose-leave and on-compose-splice.
signature
[Obsolete] Please use on-compose-splice or on-compose-splice-shell or
on-compose-leave and (if necessary) message-inject-tail instead!
skipemptybody
(Boolean) If an outgoing message has an empty first or only message part, do not
send, but discard it, successfully (also see the command line option -E).
smime-ca-dir, smime-ca-file
[Option] Specify the location of trusted CA certificates in PEM (Privacy Enhanced
Mail) for the purpose of verification of S/MIME signed messages. tls-ca-dir
documents the necessary preparation steps to use the former. The set of CA
certificates which are built into the TLS library can be explicitly turned off by
setting smime-ca-no-defaults, and further fine-tuning is possible via
smime-ca-flags.
smime-ca-flags
[Option] Can be used to fine-tune behaviour of the X509 CA certificate storage,
and the certificate verification that is used. The actual values and their
meanings are documented for tls-ca-flags.
smime-ca-no-defaults
(Boolean)[Option] Do not load the default CA locations that are built into the
used to TLS library to verify S/MIME signed messages.
smime-cipher-USER@HOST, smime-cipher
[Option] Specifies the cipher to use when generating S/MIME encrypted messages
(for the specified account). RFC 5751 mandates a default of ‘aes128’ (AES-128
CBC). Possible values are (case-insensitive and) in decreasing cipher strength:
‘aes256’ (AES-256 CBC), ‘aes192’ (AES-192 CBC), ‘aes128’ (AES-128 CBC), ‘des3’
(DES EDE3 CBC, 168 bits; default if ‘aes128’ is not available) and ‘des’ (DES CBC,
56 bits).
The actually available cipher algorithms depend on the cryptographic library that
S-nail uses. [Option] Support for more cipher algorithms may be available through
dynamic loading via EVP_get_cipherbyname(3) (OpenSSL) if S-nail has been compiled
to support this.
smime-crl-dir
[Option] Specifies a directory that contains files with CRLs in PEM format to use
when verifying S/MIME messages.
smime-crl-file
[Option] Specifies a file that contains a CRL in PEM format to use when verifying
S/MIME messages.
smime-encrypt-USER@HOST
[Option] If this variable is set, messages send to the given receiver are
encrypted before sending. The value of the variable must be set to the name of a
file that contains a certificate in PEM format.
If a message is sent to multiple recipients, each of them for whom a corresponding
variable is set will receive an individually encrypted message; other recipients
will continue to receive the message in plain text unless the
smime-force-encryption variable is set. It is recommended to sign encrypted
messages, i.e., to also set the smime-sign variable.
content-description-smime-message will be inspected for messages which become
encrypted.
smime-force-encryption
(Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to refuse sending unencrypted messages.
smime-sign
(Boolean)[Option] S/MIME sign outgoing messages with the user's (from) private key
and include the users certificate as a MIME attachment. Signing a message enables
a recipient to verify that the sender used a valid certificate, that the email
addresses in the certificate match those in the message header and that the
message content has not been altered. It does not change the message text, and
people will be able to read the message as usual.
content-description-smime-signature will be inspected. Also see smime-sign-cert,
smime-sign-include-certs and smime-sign-digest.
smime-sign-cert-USER@HOST, smime-sign-cert
[Option] Points to a file in PEM format. For the purpose of signing and
decryption this file needs to contain the user's private key, followed by his
certificate.
For message signing ‘USER@HOST’ is always derived from the value of from (or, if
that contains multiple addresses, sender). For the purpose of encryption the
recipients public encryption key (certificate) is expected; the command certsave
can be used to save certificates of signed messages (the section Signed and
encrypted messages with S/MIME gives some details). This mode of operation is
usually driven by the specialized form.
When decrypting messages the account is derived from the recipient fields (‘To:’
and ‘Cc:’) of the message, which are searched for addresses for which such a
variable is set. S-nail always uses the first address that matches, so if the
same message is sent to more than one of the user addresses using different
encryption keys, decryption might fail.
Password-encrypted keys may be used for signing and decryption. Automated
password lookup is possible via the “pseudo-hosts” ‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-key’ for
the private key, and ‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-cert’ for the certificate stored in the
same file. For example, the hypothetical address ‘bob@exam.ple’ could be driven
with a private key / certificate pair path defined in
smime-sign-cert-bob@exam.ple, and the needed passwords would then be looked up as
‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-key’ and ‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-cert’. When decrypting
the value of from will be tried as a fallback to provide the necessary
‘USER@HOST’. To include intermediate certificates, use smime-sign-include-certs.
The possible password sources are documented in On URL syntax and credential
lookup.
smime-sign-digest-USER@HOST, smime-sign-digest
[Option] Specifies the message digest to use when signing S/MIME messages. Please
remember that for this use case ‘USER@HOST’ refers to the variable from (or, if
that contains multiple addresses, sender). The available algorithms depend on the
used cryptographic library, but at least one usable built-in algorithm is ensured
as a default. If possible the standard RFC 5751 will be violated by using
‘SHA512’ instead of the mandated ‘SHA1’ due to security concerns. This variable
is ignored for very old (released before 2010) cryptographic libraries which do
not offer the necessary interface: it will be logged if that happened.
S-nail will try to add built-in support for the following message digests, names
are case-insensitive: ‘BLAKE2b512’, ‘BLAKE2s256’, ‘SHA3-512’, ‘SHA3-384’,
‘SHA3-256’, ‘SHA3-224’, as well as the widely available ‘SHA512’, ‘SHA384’,
‘SHA256’, ‘SHA224’, and the proposed insecure ‘SHA1’, finally ‘MD5’. More digests
may [Option]ally be available through dynamic loading via the OpenSSL function
EVP_get_digestbyname(3).
smime-sign-include-certs-USER@HOST, smime-sign-include-certs
[Option] If used, this is supposed to a consist of a comma-separated list of
files, each of which containing a single certificate in PEM format to be included
in the S/MIME message in addition to the smime-sign-cert certificate. This can be
used to include intermediate certificates of the certificate authority, in order
to allow the receiver's S/MIME implementation to perform a verification of the
entire certificate chain, starting from a local root certificate, over the
intermediate certificates, down to the smime-sign-cert. Even though top level
certificates may also be included in the chain, they will not be used for the
verification on the receiver's side.
For the purpose of the mechanisms involved here, ‘USER@HOST’ refers to the content
of the internal variable from (or, if that contains multiple addresses, sender).
The pseudo-host ‘USER@HOST.smime-include-certs’ will be used for performing
password lookups for these certificates, shall they have been given one, therefore
the lookup can be automated via the mechanisms described in On URL syntax and
credential lookup.
smime-sign-message-digest-USER@HOST, smime-sign-message-digest
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor(s) of smime-sign-digest.
smtp [Obsolete][Option] To use the built-in SMTP transport, specify a SMTP URL in mta.
[v15 behaviour may differ] For compatibility reasons a set smtp is used in
preference of mta.
smtp-auth-USER@HOST, smtp-auth-HOST, smtp-auth
[Option] Variable chain that controls the SMTP mta authentication method, possible
values are ‘none’ ([no v15-compat] default), ‘plain’ ([v15-compat] default),
‘login’, [v15-compat] ‘oauthbearer’ (see FAQ entry But, how about XOAUTH2 /
OAUTHBEARER?) as well as [v15-compat] ‘external’ and ‘externanon’ for TLS secured
connections which pass a client certificate via tls-config-pairs. There may be
the [Option]al methods ‘cram-md5’ and ‘gssapi’. ‘none’ and ‘externanon’ do not
need any user credentials, ‘external’ and ‘gssapi’ require a user name, and all
other methods require a user name and a password. ‘externanon’ solely builds upon
the credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go
since tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422 aka RFC 4954, and fail if
additional credentials are passed. Also see mta. Note that smtp-auth-HOST is
[v15-compat]. ([no v15-compat] Requires smtp-auth-password and smtp-auth-user.
Note for smtp-auth-USER@HOST: may override dependent on sender address in the
variable from.)
smtp-auth-password
[Option][no v15-compat] Sets the global fallback password for SMTP authentication.
If the authentication method requires a password, but neither smtp-auth-password
nor a matching smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST can be found, S-nail will ask for a
password on the user's terminal.
smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST
[no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-password for specific values of sender
addresses, dependent upon the variable from.
smtp-auth-user
[Option][no v15-compat] Sets the global fallback user name for SMTP
authentication. If the authentication method requires a user name, but neither
smtp-auth-user nor a matching smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST can be found, S-nail will
ask for a user name on the user's terminal.
smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST
[no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-user for specific values of sender addresses,
dependent upon the variable from.
smtp-hostname
[Option][v15-compat] Normally S-nail uses the variable from to derive the
necessary ‘USER@HOST’ information in order to issue a ‘MAIL FROM:<>’ SMTP mta
command. Setting smtp-hostname can be used to use the ‘USER’ from the SMTP
account (mta or the user variable chain) and the given ‘HOST’ (hostname if the
empty string is given, or the local hostname as a last resort). This often allows
using an address that is itself valid but hosted by a provider other than from
which (in from) the message is sent. Setting this variable also influences
generated ‘Message-ID:’ and ‘Content-ID:’ header fields. If the [Option]al IDNA
support is available (see idna-disable) variable assignment is aborted when a
necessary conversion fails.
smtp-use-starttls-USER@HOST, smtp-use-starttls-HOST, smtp-use-starttls
(Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to issue a ‘STARTTLS’ command to make an SMTP mta
session TLS encrypted, i.e., to enable transport layer security.
socket-connect-timeout
[Option] A positive number that defines the timeout to wait for establishing a
socket connection before forcing ^ERR-TIMEDOUT.
socks-proxy-USER@HOST, socks-proxy-HOST, socks-proxy
[Option] If set to the URL of a SOCKS5 server then all network activities are
proxied through it, except for the single DNS name lookup necessary to resolve the
proxy URL (unnecessary when given an already resolved IP address). It is
automatically squared with the environment variable SOCKS5_PROXY, changing the one
will adjust the other. This example creates a local SOCKS5 proxy on port 10000
that forwards to the machine ‘HOST’ (with identity ‘USER’), and from which actual
network traffic happens:
$ ssh -D 10000 USER@HOST
$ s-nail -Ssocks-proxy=[socks5://]localhost:10000
# or =localhost:10000; no local DNS: =127.0.0.1:10000
spam-interface
[Option] In order to use any of the spam-related commands (like spamrate) the
desired spam interface must be defined by setting this variable. Please refer to
the manual section Handling spam for the complete picture of spam handling in
S-nail. All or none of the following interfaces may be available:
‘spamc’ Interaction with spamc(1) from the spamassassin(1) (SpamAssassin:
http://spamassassin.apache.org) suite. Different to the generic filter
interface S-nail will automatically add the correct arguments for a
given command and has the necessary knowledge to parse the program's
output. A default value for spamc-command will have been compiled into
the S-nail binary if spamc(1) has been found in PATH during compilation.
Shall it be necessary to define a specific connection type (rather than
using a configuration file for that), the variable spamc-arguments can
be used as in for example ‘-d server.example.com -p 783’. It is also
possible to specify a per-user configuration via spamc-user. Note that
this interface does not inspect the ‘is-spam’ flag of a message for the
command spamforget.
‘filter’ generic spam filter support via freely configurable hooks. This
interface is meant for programs like bogofilter(1) and requires
according behaviour in respect to the hooks' exit status for at least
the command spamrate (‘0’ meaning a message is spam, ‘1’ for non-spam,
‘2’ for unsure and any other return value indicating a hard error);
since the hooks can include shell code snippets diverting behaviour can
be intercepted as necessary. The hooks are spamfilter-ham,
spamfilter-noham, spamfilter-nospam, spamfilter-rate and
spamfilter-spam; the manual section Handling spam contains examples for
some programs. The process environment of the hooks will have the
variable MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED set. Note that spam score support for
spamrate is not supported unless the [Option]tional regular expression
support is available and the spamfilter-rate-scanscore variable is set.
spam-maxsize
[Option] Messages that exceed this size will not be passed through to the
configured spam-interface. If unset or 0, the default of 420000 bytes is used.
spamc-command
[Option] The path to the spamc(1) program for the ‘spamc’ spam-interface. Note
that the path is not expanded, but used “as is”. A fallback path will have been
compiled into the S-nail binary if the executable had been found during
compilation.
spamc-arguments
[Option] Even though S-nail deals with most arguments for the ‘spamc’
spam-interface automatically, it may at least sometimes be desirable to specify
connection-related ones via this variable, for example ‘-d server.example.com -p
783’.
spamc-user
[Option] Specify a username for per-user configuration files for the ‘spamc’
spam-interface. If this is set to the empty string then S-nail will use the name
of the current user.
spamfilter-ham, spamfilter-noham, spamfilter-nospam, spamfilter-rate, spamfilter-spam
[Option] Command and argument hooks for the ‘filter’ spam-interface. The manual
section Handling spam contains examples for some programs.
spamfilter-rate-scanscore
[Option] Because of the generic nature of the ‘filter’ spam-interface spam scores
are not supported for it by default, but if the [Option]nal regular expression
support is available then setting this variable can be used to overcome this
restriction. It is interpreted as follows: first a number (digits) is parsed that
must be followed by a semicolon ‘;’ and an extended regular expression. Then the
latter is used to parse the first output line of the spamfilter-rate hook, and, in
case the evaluation is successful, the group that has been specified via the
number is interpreted as a floating point scan score.
ssl-ca-dir-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-dir-HOST, ssl-ca-dir, ssl-ca-file-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-file-HOST,
ssl-ca-file
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-ca-file, tls-ca-dir.
ssl-ca-flags-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-flags-HOST, ssl-ca-flags
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-ca-flags.
ssl-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-no-defaults-HOST, ssl-ca-no-defaults
[Obsolete](Boolean)[Option] Predecessor of tls-ca-no-defaults.
ssl-cert-USER@HOST, ssl-cert-HOST, ssl-cert
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the Certificate slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-cipher-list-USER@HOST, ssl-cipher-list-HOST, ssl-cipher-list
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the CipherString slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-config-file
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-file.
ssl-config-module-USER@HOST, ssl-config-module-HOST, ssl-config-module
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-module.
ssl-config-pairs-USER@HOST, ssl-config-pairs-HOST, ssl-config-pairs
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-crl-dir, ssl-crl-file
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file.
ssl-curves-USER@HOST, ssl-curves-HOST, ssl-curves
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the Curves slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-features
[Obsolete][Option](Read-only) Predecessor of tls-features.
ssl-key-USER@HOST, ssl-key-HOST, ssl-key
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the PrivateKey slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-method-USER@HOST, ssl-method-HOST, ssl-method
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the Protocol slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-protocol-USER@HOST, ssl-protocol-HOST, ssl-protocol
[Obsolete][Option] Please use the Protocol slot of tls-config-pairs.
ssl-rand-file
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-rand-file.
ssl-verify-USER@HOST, ssl-verify-HOST, ssl-verify
[Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-verify.
stealthmua
If only set without an assigned value, then this setting inhibits the generation
of the ‘Message-ID:’, ‘Content-ID:’ and ‘User-Agent:’ header fields that include
obvious references to S-nail. There are two pitfalls associated with this: First,
the message id of outgoing messages is not known anymore. Second, an expert may
still use the remaining information in the header to track down the originating
mail user agent. If set to the value ‘noagent’, then the mentioned ‘Message-ID:’
and ‘Content-ID:’ suppression does not occur.
system-mailrc
(Read-only) The compiled in path of the system wide initialization file one of the
Resource files: s-nail.rc.
termcap ([Option]) This specifies a comma-separated list of Terminal Information Library
(libterminfo, -lterminfo) and/or Termcap Access Library (libtermcap, -ltermcap)
capabilities (see On terminal control and line editor, escape commas with reverse
solidus ‘\’) to be used to overwrite or define entries. Note this variable will
only be queried once at program startup and can thus only be specified in resource
files or on the command line. It will always be inspected, regardless of whether
features denotes termcap/terminfo library support via ‘,+termcap,’.
String capabilities form ‘cap=value’ pairs and are expected unless noted
otherwise. Numerics have to be notated as ‘cap#number’ where the number is
expected in normal decimal notation. Finally, booleans do not have any value but
indicate a true or false state simply by being defined or not; this indeed means
that S-nail does not support undefining an existing boolean. String capability
values will undergo some expansions before use: for one notations like ‘^LETTER’
stand for ‘control-LETTER’, and for clarification purposes ‘\E’ can be used to
specify ‘escape’ (the control notation ‘^[’ could lead to misreadings when a left
bracket follows, which it does for the standard CSI sequence); finally three
letter octal sequences, as in ‘\061’, are supported. To specify that a terminal
supports 256-colours, and to define sequences that home the cursor and produce an
audible bell, one might write:
? set termcap='Co#256,home=\E[H,bel=^G'
The following terminal capabilities are or may be meaningful for the operation of
the built-in line editor or S-nail in general:
am auto_right_margin: boolean which indicates if the right margin needs
special treatment; the xenl capability is related, for more see COLUMNS.
This capability is only used when backed by library support.
clear or cl
clear_screen: clear the screen and home cursor. (Will be simulated via
ho plus cd.)
colors or Co
max_colors: numeric capability specifying the maximum number of colours.
Note that S-nail does not actually care about the terminal beside that,
but always emits ANSI / ISO 6429 escape sequences; also see colour.
cr carriage_return: move to the first column in the current row. The
default built-in fallback is ‘\r’.
cub1 or le
cursor_left: move the cursor left one space (non-destructively). The
default built-in fallback is ‘\b’.
cuf1 or nd
cursor_right: move the cursor right one space (non-destructively). The
default built-in fallback is ‘\E[C’, which is used by most terminals.
Less often occur ‘\EC’ and ‘\EOC’.
ed or cd clr_eos: clear the screen.
el or ce clr_eol: clear to the end of line. (Will be simulated via ch plus
repetitions of space characters.)
home or ho
cursor_home: home cursor.
hpa or ch
column_address: move the cursor (to the given column parameter) in the
current row. (Will be simulated via cr plus nd.)
rmcup or te / smcup or ti
exit_ca_mode and enter_ca_mode, respectively: exit and enter the
alternative screen ca-mode, effectively turning S-nail into a fullscreen
application. This must be enabled explicitly by setting
termcap-ca-mode.
smkx or ks / rmkx or ke
keypad_xmit and keypad_local, respectively: enable and disable the
keypad. This is always enabled if available, because it seems even
keyboards without keypads generate other key codes for, e.g., cursor
keys in that case, and only if enabled we see the codes that we are
interested in.
xenl or xn
eat_newline_glitch: boolean which indicates whether a newline written in
the last column of an auto_right_margin indicating terminal is ignored.
With it the full terminal width is available even on autowrap terminals.
This will be inspected even without ‘,+termcap,’ features.
Many more capabilities which describe key-sequences are documented for bind.
termcap-ca-mode
[Option] Allow usage of the exit_ca_mode and enter_ca_mode termcapabilities in
order to enter an alternative exclusive screen, the so-called ca-mode; this
usually requires special configuration of the PAGER, also dependent on the value
of crt. Note this variable will only be queried once at program startup and can
thus only be specified in resource files or on the command line.
termcap-disable
[Option] Disable any interaction with a terminal control library. If set only
some generic fallback built-ins and possibly the content of termcap describe the
terminal to S-nail. Note this variable will only be queried once at program
startup and can thus only be specified in resource files or on the command line.
tls-ca-dir-USER@HOST, tls-ca-dir-HOST, tls-ca-dir, tls-ca-file-USER@HOST, tls-ca-file-HOST,
tls-ca-file
[Option] Directory and file, respectively, for pools of trusted CA certificates in
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) format, for the purpose of verification of TLS server
certificates. Concurrent use is possible, the file is loaded once needed first,
the directory lookup is performed anew as a last resort whenever necessary. The
CA certificate pool built into the TLS library can be disabled via
tls-ca-no-defaults, further fine-tuning is possible via tls-ca-flags. The
directory search requires special filename conventions, please see
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) and verify(1) (or c_rehash(1)).
tls-ca-flags-USER@HOST, tls-ca-flags-HOST, tls-ca-flags
[Option] Can be used to fine-tune behaviour of the X509 CA certificate storage,
and the certificate verification that is used (also see tls-verify). The value is
expected to consist of a comma-separated list of configuration directives, with
any intervening whitespace being ignored. The directives directly map to flags
that can be passed to X509_STORE_set_flags(3), which are usually defined in a file
openssl/x509_vfy.h, and the availability of which depends on the used TLS library
version: a directive without mapping is ignored (error log subject to debug).
Directives currently understood (case-insensitively) include:
no-alt-chains
If the initial chain is not trusted, do not attempt to build an
alternative chain. Setting this flag will make OpenSSL certificate
verification match that of older OpenSSL versions, before automatic
building and checking of alternative chains has been implemented; also
see trusted-first.
no-check-time
Do not check certificate/CRL validity against current time.
partial-chain
By default partial, incomplete chains which cannot be verified up to the
chain top, a self-signed root certificate, will not verify. With this
flag set, a chain succeeds to verify if at least one signing certificate
of the chain is in any of the configured trusted stores of CA
certificates. The OpenSSL manual page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)
gives some advise how to manage your own trusted store of CA
certificates.
strict Disable workarounds for broken certificates.
trusted-first
Try building a chain using issuers in the trusted store first to avoid
problems with server-sent legacy intermediate certificates. Newer
versions of OpenSSL support alternative chain checking and enable it by
default, resulting in the same behaviour; also see no-alt-chains.
tls-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST, tls-ca-no-defaults-HOST, tls-ca-no-defaults
(Boolean)[Option] Do not load the default CA locations that are built into the
used to TLS library to verify TLS server certificates.
tls-config-file
[Option] If this variable is set CONF_modules_load_file(3) (if announced via
‘,+modules-load-file,’ in tls-features) is used to allow resource file based
configuration of the TLS library. This happens once the library is used first,
which may also be early during startup (logged with verbose)! If a non-empty
value is given then the given file, after performing Filename transformations,
will be used instead of the TLS libraries global default, and it is an error if
the file cannot be loaded. The application name will always be passed as
‘s-nail’. Some TLS libraries support application-specific configuration via
resource files loaded like this, please see tls-config-module.
tls-config-module-USER@HOST, tls-config-module-HOST, tls-config-module
[Option] If file based application-specific configuration via tls-config-file is
available, announced as ‘,+ctx-config,’ by tls-features, indicating availability
of SSL_CTX_config(3), then, it becomes possible to use a central TLS configuration
file for all programs, including s-nail, for example
# Register a configuration section for s-nail
s-nail = mailx_master
# The top configuration section creates a relation
# in between dynamic SSL configuration and an actual
# program specific configuration section
[mailx_master]
ssl_conf = mailx_tls_config
# And that program specific configuration section now
# can map diverse tls-config-module names to sections,
# as in: tls-config-module=account_xy
[mailx_tls_config]
account_xy = mailx_account_xy
account_yz = mailx_account_yz
[mailx_account_xy]
MinProtocol = TLSv1.2
Curves=P-521
[mailx_account_yz]
CipherString = TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:
MinProtocol = TLSv1.1
Options = Bugs
tls-config-pairs-USER@HOST, tls-config-pairs-HOST, tls-config-pairs
[Option] The value of this variable chain will be interpreted as a comma-separated
list of directive/value pairs. Directives and values need to be separated by
equals signs ‘=’, any whitespace surrounding pair members is removed. Keys are
(usually) case-insensitive. Different to when placing these pairs in a
tls-config-module section of a tls-config-file, commas ‘,’ need to be escaped with
a reverse solidus ‘\’ when included in pairs; also different: if the equals sign
‘=’ is preceded with an asterisk ‘*’ Filename transformations will be performed on
the value; it is an error if these fail. Unless proper support is announced by
tls-features (‘,+conf-ctx,’) only the keys below are supported, otherwise the
pairs will be used directly as arguments to the function SSL_CONF_cmd(3).
Certificate Filename of a TLS client certificate (chain) required by some
servers. Fallback support via
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(3). Filename transformations are
performed. PrivateKey will be set to the same value if not
initialized explicitly. Some services support so-called ‘external’
authentication if a TLS client certificate was successfully
presented during connection establishment (“connecting is
authenticating”).
CipherString A list of ciphers for TLS connections, see ciphers(1). By default
no list of ciphers is set, resulting in a Protocol-specific list of
ciphers (the protocol standards define lists of acceptable ciphers;
possibly cramped by the used TLS library). Fallback support via
SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3).
Ciphersuites A list of ciphers used for TLSv1.3 connections, see ciphers(1).
These will be joined onto the list of ciphers from CipherString.
Available if tls-features announces ‘,+ctx-set-ciphersuites,’, as
necessary via SSL_CTX_set_ciphersuites(3).
Curves A list of supported elliptic curves, if applicable. By default no
curves are set. Fallback support via SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list(3),
if available.
MaxProtocol, MinProtocol
The maximum and minimum supported TLS versions, respectively.
Available if tls-features announces ‘,+ctx-set-maxmin-proto,’, as
necessary via SSL_CTX_set_max_proto_version(3) and
SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3); these fallbacks use an internal
parser which understands the strings ‘SSLv3’, ‘TLSv1’, ‘TLSv1.1’,
‘TLSv1.2’, ‘TLSv1.3’, and the special value ‘None’, which disables
the given limit.
Options Various flags to set. Fallback via SSL_CTX_set_options(3), in which
case any other value but (exactly) ‘Bugs’ results in an error.
PrivateKey Filename of the private key in PEM format of a TLS client
certificate. If unset, the value of Certificate is used. Filename
transformations are performed. Fallback via
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(3).
Protocol The used TLS protocol. If tls-features announces ‘,+conf-ctx,’ or
‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto’ then using MaxProtocol and MinProtocol is
preferable. Fallback is SSL_CTX_set_options(3), driven via an
internal parser which understands the strings ‘SSLv3’, ‘TLSv1’,
‘TLSv1.1’, ‘TLSv1.2’, ‘TLSv1.3’, and the special value ‘ALL’.
Multiple protocols may be given as a comma-separated list, any
whitespace is ignored, an optional plus sign ‘+’ prefix enables, a
hyphen-minus ‘-’ prefix disables a protocol, so that ‘-ALL, TLSv1.2’
enables only the TLSv1.2 protocol.
tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file
[Option] Specify a directory / a file, respectively, that contains a CRL in PEM
format to use when verifying TLS server certificates.
tls-features
[Option](Read-only) This expands to a comma-separated list of the TLS library
identity and optional features. To ease substring matching the string starts and
ends with a comma. Currently supported identities are ‘libressl’ (LibreSSL) ,
‘libssl-0x30000’ (OpenSSL v3.0.0 series), ‘libssl-0x10100’ (OpenSSL v1.1.x series)
and ‘libssl-0x10000’ (elder OpenSSL series, other clones). Optional features are
preceded with a plus sign ‘+’ when available, and with a hyphen-minus ‘-’
otherwise.
Currently known features are ‘conf-ctx’ (tls-config-pairs), ‘ctx-config’
(tls-config-module), ‘ctx-set-ciphersuites’ (Ciphersuites slot of
tls-config-pairs), ‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto’ (tls-config-pairs), ‘modules-load-file’
(tls-config-file), and ‘tls-rand-file’ (tls-rand-file).
tls-fingerprint-USER@HOST, tls-fingerprint-HOST, tls-fingerprint
[Option] It is possible to replace the verification of the connection peer
certificate against the entire local pool of CAs (for more see Encrypted network
communication) with the comparison against a precalculated certificate message
digest, the so-called fingerprint, to be specified as the used
tls-fingerprint-digest. This fingerprint can for example be calculated with ‘tls
fingerprint HOST’.
tls-fingerprint-digest-USER@HOST, tls-fingerprint-digest-HOST, tls-fingerprint-digest
[Option] The message digest to be used when creating TLS certificate fingerprints,
the defaults, if available, in test order, being ‘BLAKE2s256’, ‘SHA256’. For the
complete list of digest algorithms refer to smime-sign-digest.
tls-rand-file
[Option] If tls-features announces ‘,+tls-rand-file,’ then this will be queried to
find a file with random entropy data which can be used to seed the
P(seudo)R(andom)N(umber)G(enerator), see RAND_load_file(3). The default filename
(RAND_file_name(3), normally ~/.rnd) will be used if this variable is not set or
empty, or if the Filename transformations fail. Shall seeding the PRNG have been
successful, RAND_write_file(3) will be called to update the entropy. Remarks:
libraries which do not announce this feature seed the PRNG by other means.
tls-verify-USER@HOST, tls-verify-HOST, tls-verify
[Option] Variable chain that sets the action to be performed if an error occurs
during TLS server certificate validation against the specified or default trust
stores tls-ca-dir, tls-ca-file, or the TLS library built-in defaults (unless usage
disallowed via tls-ca-no-defaults), and as fine-tuned via tls-ca-flags. Valid
(case-insensitive) values are ‘strict’ (fail and close connection immediately),
‘ask’ (ask whether to continue on standard input), ‘warn’ (show a warning and
continue), ‘ignore’ (do not perform validation). The default is ‘ask’.
toplines If defined, gives the number of lines of a message to be displayed with the
command top; if unset, the first five lines are printed, if set to 0 the variable
screen is inspected. If the value is negative then its absolute value will be
used for unsigned right shifting (see vexpr) the screen height.
topsqueeze
(Boolean) If set then the top command series will strip adjacent empty lines and
quotations.
ttycharset
The character set of the terminal S-nail operates on, and the one and only
supported character set that S-nail can use if no character set conversion
capabilities have been compiled into it, in which case it defaults to ISO-8859-1.
Otherwise it defaults to UTF-8. Sufficient locale support provided the default
will be preferably deduced from the locale environment if that is set (for example
LC_CTYPE, see there for more); runtime locale changes will be reflected by
ttycharset except during the program startup phase and if -S had been used to
freeze the given value. Refer to the section Character sets for the complete
picture about character sets.
typescript-mode
(Boolean) A special multiplex variable that disables all variables and settings
which result in behaviour that interferes with running S-nail in script(1); it
sets colour-disable, line-editor-disable and (before startup completed only)
termcap-disable. Unsetting it does not restore the former state of the covered
settings.
umask For a safe-by-default policy the process file mode creation mask umask(2) will be
set to ‘0077’ on program startup after the resource files have been loaded, and
unless this variable is set. By assigning this an empty value the active setting
will not be changed, otherwise the given value will be made the new file mode
creation mask. Child processes inherit the file mode creation mask of their
parent.
user-HOST, user
[v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a global fallback user name, used in case
none has been given in the protocol and account-specific URL. This variable
defaults to the name of the user who runs S-nail.
v15-compat
Enable upward compatibility with S-nail version 15.0 in respect to which
configuration options are available and how they are handled. If set to a non-
empty value the command modifier wysh is implied and thus enforces Shell-style
argument quoting over Old-style argument quoting for all commands which support
both. This manual uses [v15-compat] and [no v15-compat] to refer to the new and
the old way of doing things, respectively.
verbose Verbose mode enables logging of informational context messages. Historically a
(Boolean) variable, this can either be set multiple times (what the command line
option -v uses), or be assigned a numeric value in order to increase verbosity.
Assigning the value 0 disables verbosity and thus (almost) equals unset. The
maximum number is 3. Also see debug.
version, version-date, version-hexnum, version-major, version-minor, version-update
(Read-only) S-nail version information: the first variable is a string with the
complete version identification, the second the release date in ISO 8601 notation
without time. The third is a 32-bit hexadecimal number with the upper 8 bits
storing the major, followed by the minor and update version numbers which occupy
12 bits each. The latter three variables contain only decimal digits: the major,
minor and update version numbers. The output of the command version will include
this information.
writebackedited
If this variable is set messages modified using the edit or visual commands are
written back to the current folder when it is quit; it is only honoured for
writable folders in MBOX format, though. Note that the editor will be pointed to
the raw message content in that case, i.e., neither MIME decoding nor decryption
will have been performed, and proper mbox-rfc4155 ‘From_’ quoting of newly added
or edited content is also left as an exercise to the user.
ENVIRONMENT
The term “environment variable” should be considered an indication that these variables are
either standardized as vivid parts of process environments, or that they are commonly found
in there. The process environment is inherited from the sh(1) once S-nail is started, and
unless otherwise explicitly noted handling of the following variables transparently
integrates into that of the INTERNAL VARIABLES from S-nail's point of view. This means they
can be managed via set and unset, causing automatic program environment updates (to be
inherited by newly created child processes).
In order to integrate other environment variables equally they need to be imported (linked)
with the command environ. This command can also be used to set and unset non-integrated
environment variables from scratch, sufficient system support provided. The following
example, applicable to a POSIX shell, sets the COLUMNS environment variable for S-nail only,
and beforehand exports the EDITOR in order to affect any further processing in the running
shell:
$ EDITOR="vim -u ${HOME}/.vimrc"
$ export EDITOR
$ COLUMNS=80 s-nail -R
COLUMNS The user's preferred width in column positions for the terminal screen. Queried
and used once on program startup in interactive or batch (-#) mode, actively
managed for child processes and the MLE (see On terminal control and line editor)
in interactive mode thereafter. Non-interactive mode always uses, and the
fallback default is a compile-time constant, by default 80 columns. If in batch
mode COLUMNS and LINES are both set but not both are usable (empty, not a number,
or 0) at program startup, then the real terminal screen size will be (tried to be)
determined once. (Normally the sh(1) manages these variables, and unsets them for
pipe specifications etc.)
DEAD The name of the (mailbox) folder to use for saving aborted messages if save is
set; this defaults to ~/dead.letter. If the variable debug is set no output will
be generated, otherwise the contents of the file will be replaced. Except shell
globs Filename transformations (also see folder) will be performed.
EDITOR Pathname of the text editor to use for the edit command and ~e (see COMMAND
ESCAPES); VISUAL is used for a more display oriented editor.
HOME The user's home directory. This variable is only used when it resides in the
process environment. The calling user's home directory will be used instead if
this directory does not exist, is not accessible or cannot be read; it will always
be used for the root user. (No test for being writable is performed to allow
usage by non-privileged users within read-only jails, but dependent on settings
this directory is a default write target for, for example, DEAD, MBOX and more.)
LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, LANG
[Option] The (names in lookup order of the) locale(7) (and / or see setlocale(3))
which indicates the used Character sets. Runtime changes trigger automatic
updates of the entire locale system, which includes updating ttycharset (except
during startup if the variable has been frozen via -S).
LINES The user's preferred number of lines for the terminal screen. The behaviour is as
described for COLUMNS, yet the compile-time constant used in non-interactive mode
and as a fallback defaults to 24 (lines).
LISTER Pathname of the directory lister to use in the folders command when operating on
local mailboxes. Default is ls(1) (path search through SHELL).
LOGNAME Upon startup S-nail will actively ensure that this variable refers to the name of
the user who runs S-nail, in order to be able to pass a verified name to any newly
created child process.
MAIL Is used as the user's primary system mailbox unless inbox is set. If the
environmental fallback is also not set, a built-in compile-time default is used.
This is assumed to be an absolute pathname.
MAILCAPS [Option] Override the default path search of The Mailcap files: any existing file
therein will be loaded in sequence, appending any content to the list of MIME type
handler directives. The RFC 1524 standard imposed default value is assigned
otherwise: ‘~/.mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap’.
(The default value is a compile-time [Option].)
MAILRC Is used as a startup file instead of ~/.mailrc if set. In order to avoid side-
effects from configuration files scripts should either set this variable to
/dev/null or the -: command line option should be used.
MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC
If this variable is set then reading of s-nail.rc (aka system-mailrc) at startup
is inhibited, i.e., the same effect is achieved as if S-nail had been started up
with the option -: (and according argument) or -n. This variable is only used
when it resides in the process environment.
MBOX The name of the user's secondary mailbox file. A logical subset of the special
Filename transformations (also see folder) are supported. The default is ~/mbox.
Traditionally this MBOX is used as the file to save messages from the primary
system mailbox that have been read. Also see Message states.
NETRC [v15-compat][Option] This variable overrides the default location of the user's ~/
.netrc file.
PAGER Pathname of the program to use for backing the command more, and when the crt
variable enforces usage of a pager for output. The default paginator is more(1)
(path search through SHELL).
S-nail inspects the contents of this variable: if its contains the string “less”
then a non-existing environment variable LESS will be set to (the portable) ‘RI’,
likewise for “lv” LV will optionally be set to ‘-c’. Also see colour-pager.
PATH A colon-separated list of directories that is searched by the shell when looking
for commands, for example ‘/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/local/bin’.
POSIXLY_CORRECT
This environment entry is automatically squared with posix.
SHELL The shell to use for the commands !, shell, the ~! COMMAND ESCAPES and when
starting subprocesses. A default shell is used if this environment variable is
not defined.
SOCKS5_PROXY
This environment entry is automatically squared with socks-proxy.
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH
Specifies a time in seconds since the Unix epoch (1970-01-01) to be used in place
of the current time. This variable is looked up upon program startup, and its
existence will switch S-nail to a reproducible mode (https://reproducible-
builds.org) which uses deterministic random numbers, a special fixated pseudo
LOGNAME and more. This operation mode is used for development and by software
packagers. [v15 behaviour may differ] Currently an invalid setting is only
ignored, rather than causing a program abortion.
$ SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH=`date +%s` s-nail
TERM [Option] The terminal type for which output is to be prepared. For extended
colour and font control please refer to Coloured display, and for terminal
management in general to On terminal control and line editor.
TMPDIR Except for the root user this variable defines the directory for temporary files
to be used instead of /tmp (or the given compile-time constant) if set, existent,
accessible as well as read- and writable. This variable is only used when it
resides in the process environment, but S-nail will ensure at startup that this
environment variable is updated to contain a usable temporary directory.
USER Identical to LOGNAME (see there), but this variable is not standardized, should
therefore not be used, and is only corrected if already set.
VISUAL Pathname of the text editor to use for the visual command and ~v (see COMMAND
ESCAPES); EDITOR is used for a less display oriented editor.
FILES
~/.mailcap, /etc/mailcap
[Option] Personal and system-wide MIME type handler definition files, see The
Mailcap files. (The shown names are part of the RFC 1524 standard search path
MAILCAPS.)
~/.mailrc, s-nail.rc
User-specific and system-wide files giving initial commands, the Resource files.
(The used filenames come from MAILRC and system-mailrc, respectively.)
~/mbox The default value for MBOX.
~/.mime.types, /etc/mime.types
Personal and system-wide MIME types, see The mime.types files.
~/.netrc [v15-compat][Option] The default location of the user's .netrc file – the section
The .netrc file documents the file format. The used path can be set via NETRC.
/dev/null
The data sink null(4).
~/.rnd [Option] Possible location for persistent random entropy seed storage, see
tls-rand-file.
Resource files
Upon startup S-nail reads in several resource files, in order:
s-nail.rc
System wide initialization file (system-mailrc). Reading of this file can be
suppressed, either by using the -: (and according argument) or -n command line
options, or by setting the ENVIRONMENT variable MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC.
~/.mailrc
File giving initial commands. A different file can be chosen by setting the
ENVIRONMENT variable MAILRC. Reading of this file can be suppressed with the -:
command line option.
mailx-extra-rc
Defines a startup file to be read after all other resource files. It can be used
to specify settings that are not understood by other mailx(1) implementations, for
example.
The content of these files is interpreted as follows:
• The whitespace characters space, tabulator and newline, as well as those defined by the
variable ifs, are removed from the beginning and end of input lines.
• Empty lines are ignored.
• Any other line is interpreted as a command. It may be spread over multiple input lines
if the newline character is “escaped” by placing a reverse solidus character ‘\’ as the
last character of the line; whereas any leading whitespace of follow lines is ignored,
trailing whitespace before a escaped newline remains in the input.
• If the line (content) starts with the number sign ‘#’ then it is a comment-command and
also ignored. (The comment-command is a real command, which does nothing, and therefore
the usual follow lines mechanism applies!)
Errors while loading these files are subject to the settings of errexit and posix. More
files with syntactically equal content can be sourceed. The following, saved in a file,
would be an examplary content:
# This line is a comment command. And y\
es, it is really continued here.
set debug \
verbose
set editheaders
The mime.types files
As stated in HTML mail and MIME attachments S-nail needs to learn about MIME (Multipurpose
Internet Mail Extensions) media types in order to classify message and attachment content.
One source for them are mime.types files, the loading of which can be controlled by setting
the variable mimetypes-load-control. Another is the command mimetype, which also offers
access to S-nails MIME type cache. mime.types files have the following syntax:
type/subtype extension [extension ...]
# For example text/html html htm
where ‘type/subtype’ define the MIME media type, as standardized in RFC 2046: ‘type’ is used
to declare the general type of data, while the ‘subtype’ specifies a specific format for
that type of data. One or multiple filename ‘extension’s, separated by whitespace, can be
bound to the media type format. Comments may be introduced anywhere on a line with a number
sign ‘#’, causing the remaining line to be discarded. S-nail also supports an extended,
non-portable syntax in especially crafted files, which can be loaded via the alternative
value syntax of mimetypes-load-control, and prepends an optional ‘type-marker’:
[type-marker ]type/subtype extension [extension ...]
The following type markers are supported:
? Treat message parts with this content as plain text.
?t The same as plain ?.
?h Treat message parts with this content as HTML tagsoup. If the [Option]al HTML-
tagsoup-to-text converter is not available treat the content as plain text
instead.
?H Likewise ?h, but instead of falling back to plain text require an explicit content
handler to be defined.
?q If no handler can be found a text message is displayed which says so. This can be
annoying, for example signatures serve a contextual purpose, their content is of
no use by itself. This marker will avoid displaying the text message.
Further reading: for sending messages: mimetype, mime-allow-text-controls,
mimetypes-load-control. For reading etc. messages: HTML mail and MIME attachments, The
Mailcap files, mimetype, mime-counter-evidence, mimetypes-load-control, pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE,
pipe-EXTENSION.
The Mailcap files
[Option] RFC 1524 defines a “User Agent Configuration Mechanism” to be used to inform mail
user agent programs about the locally installed facilities for handling various data
formats, i.e., about commands and how they can be used to display, edit et cetera MIME part
contents, as well as a default path search that includes multiple possible locations of
resource files, and the MAILCAPS environment variable to overwrite that. Handlers found
from doing the path search will be cached, the command mailcap operates on that cache, and
the variable mailcap-disable will suppress automatic loading, and usage of any mailcap
handlers. HTML mail and MIME attachments gives a general overview of how MIME types are
handled.
“Mailcap” files consist of a set of newline separated entries. Comment lines start with a
number sign ‘#’ (in the first column!) and are ignored. Empty lines are ignored. All other
lines are interpreted as mailcap entries. An entry definition may be split over multiple
lines by placing the reverse solidus character ‘\’ last in all but the final line. The
standard does not specify how leading whitespace of successive lines is to be treated,
therefore they are retained.
“Mailcap” entries consist of a number of semicolon ‘;’ separated fields. The first two
fields are mandatory and must occur in the specified order, the remaining fields are
optional and may appear in any order. Leading and trailing whitespace of field content is
ignored (removed). The reverse solidus ‘\’ character can be used to escape any following
character including semicolon and itself in the content of the second field, and in value
parts of any optional key/value field.
The first field defines the MIME ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’ the entry is about to handle (case-
insensitively). If the subtype is specified as an asterisk ‘*’ the entry is meant to match
all subtypes of the named type, e.g., ‘audio/*’ would match any audio type. The second
field is the view shell command used to display MIME parts of the given type.
Data consuming shell commands will be fed message (MIME part) data on standard input unless
one or more instances of the (unquoted) string ‘%s’ are used: these formats will be replaced
with a temporary file(name) that has been prefilled with the parts data. Data producing
shell commands are expected to generata data on their standard output unless that format is
used. In all cases any given ‘%s’ format is replaced with a properly shell quoted filename.
When a command requests a temporary file via ‘%s’ then that will be removed again, as if the
x-mailx-tmpfile and x-mailx-tmpfile-fill flags had been set; unless the command requests
x-mailx-async the x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink flag is also implied; see below for more.
Optional fields define single-word flags (case-insensitive), or key / value pairs consisting
of a case-insensitive keyword, an equals sign ‘=’, and a shell command; whitespace
surrounding the equals sign is removed. Optional fields include the following:
compose A program that can be used to compose a new body or body part in the given format.
(Currently unused.)
composetyped
Similar to the compose field, but is to be used when the composing program needs
to specify the ‘Content-type:’ header field to be applied to the composed data.
(Currently unused.)
copiousoutput
A flag field which indicates that the output of the view command is integrable
into S-nails normal visual display. It is mutually exclusive with needsterminal.
description
A textual description that describes this type of data. The text may optionally
be enclosed within double quotation marks ‘"’.
edit A program that can be used to edit a body or body part in the given format.
(Currently unused.)
nametemplate
This field specifies a filename format for the ‘%s’ format used in the shell
command fields, in which ‘%s’ will be replaced by a random string. (The filename
is also stored in and passed to subprocesses via MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY.) The
standard says this is “only expected to be relevant in environments where filename
extensions are meaningful”, and so this field is ignored unless the ‘%s’ is a
prefix, optionally followed by (ASCII) alphabetic and numeric characters, the
underscore and the period. For example, to specify that a JPG file is to be
passed to an image viewer with a name ending in ‘.jpg’, ‘nametemplate=%s.jpg’ can
be used.
needsterminal
This flag field indicates that the given shell command must be run on an
interactive terminal. S-nail will temporarily release the terminal to the given
command in interactive mode, in non-interactive mode this entry will be entirely
ignored; this flag implies x-mailx-noquote.
print A program that can be used to print a message or body part in the given format.
(Currently unused.)
test Specifies a program to be run to test some condition, for example, the machine
architecture, or the window system in use, to determine whether or not this
mailcap entry applies. If the test fails, a subsequent mailcap entry should be
sought; also see x-mailx-test-once. Standard I/O of the test program is
redirected from and to /dev/null, and the format ‘%s’ is not supported (the data
does not yet exist).
textualnewlines
A flag field which indicates that this type of data is line-oriented and that, if
encoded in ‘base64’, all newlines should be converted to canonical form (CRLF)
before encoding, and will be in that form after decoding. (Currently unused.)
x11-bitmap
Names a file, in X11 bitmap (xbm) format, which points to an appropriate icon to
be used to visually denote the presence of this kind of data. This field is not
used by S-nail.
x-mailx-async
Extension flag field that denotes that the given view command shall be executed
asynchronously, without blocking S-nail. Cannot be used in conjunction with
needsterminal; the standard output of the command will go to /dev/null.
x-mailx-noquote
An extension flag field that indicates that even a copiousoutput view command
shall not be used when quoteing messages, as it would by default.
x-mailx-test-once
Extension flag which denotes whether the given test command shall be evaluated
once only with its exit status being cached. This is handy if some global
unchanging condition is to be queried, like “running under the X Window System”.
x-mailx-tmpfile
Extension flag field that requests creation of a zero-sized temporary file, the
name of which is to be placed in the environment variable
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY. It is an error to use this flag with commands that
include a ‘%s’ format (because that is implemented by means of this temporary
file).
x-mailx-tmpfile-fill
Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard input; if
this flag is set then the data will instead be written into the implied
x-mailx-tmpfile. In order to cause deletion of the temporary file you will have
to set x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink explicitly! It is an error to use this flag with
commands that include a ‘%s’ format.
x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink
Extension flag field that requests that the temporary file shall be deleted
automatically when the command loop is entered again at latest. It is an error to
use this flag with commands that include a ‘%s’ format, or in conjunction with
x-mailx-async. x-mailx-tmpfile is implied.
x-mailx-last-resort
An extension flag that indicates that this handler shall only be used as a last
resort, when no other source (see HTML mail and MIME attachments) provides a MIME
handler.
x-mailx-ignore
An extension that enforces that this handler is not used at all.
The standard includes the possibility to define any number of additional fields, prefixed by
‘x-’. Flag fields apply to the entire “Mailcap” entry — in some unusual cases, this may not
be desirable, but differentiation can be accomplished via separate entries, taking advantage
of the fact that subsequent entries are searched if an earlier one does not provide enough
information. For example, if a view command needs to specify the needsterminal flag, but
the compose command shall not, the following will help out the latter:
application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; needsterminal
application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; compose=idraw %s
In value parts of command fields any occurrence of the format string ‘%t’ will be replaced
by the ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’ specification. Any named parameter from a messages' ‘Content-type:’
field may be embedded into the command line using the format ‘%{’ followed by the parameter
name and a closing brace ‘}’ character. The entire parameter should appear as a single
command line argument, regardless of embedded spaces, shell quoting will be performed by the
RFC 1524 processor, thus:
# Message
Content-type: multipart/mixed; boundary=42
# Mailcap file
multipart/*; /usr/local/bin/showmulti \
%t %{boundary} ; composetyped = /usr/local/bin/makemulti
# Executed shell command
/usr/local/bin/showmulti multipart/mixed 42
Note that S-nail does not support handlers for multipart MIME parts as shown in this example
(as of today). It does not support the additional formats ‘%n’ and ‘%F’. An example file,
also showing how to properly deal with the expansion of ‘%s’, which includes any quotes that
are necessary to make it a valid shell argument by itself and thus will cause undesired
behaviour when placed in additional user-provided quotes:
# Comment line
text/richtext; richtext %s; copiousoutput
text/x-perl; perl -cWT %s; nametemplate = %s.pl
# Exit EX_TEMPFAIL=75 on signal
application/pdf; \
infile=%s\; \
trap "rm -f ${infile}" EXIT\; \
trap "exit 75" INT QUIT TERM\; \
mupdf "${infile}"; \
test = [ -n "${DISPLAY}" ]; \
nametemplate = %s.pdf; x-mailx-async
application/pdf; pdftotext -layout - -; copiousoutput
application/*; echo "This is \\"%t\\" but \
is 50 \% Greek to me" \; < %s head -c 512 | cat -vet; \
copiousoutput; x-mailx-noquote; x-mailx-last-resort
Further reading: HTML mail and MIME attachments, The mime.types files, mimetype, MAILCAPS,
mime-counter-evidence, pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE, pipe-EXTENSION.
The .netrc file
User credentials for machine accounts (see On URL syntax and credential lookup) can be
placed in the .netrc file, which will be loaded and cached when requested by netrc-lookup.
The default location ~/.netrc may be overridden by the NETRC environment variable. As long
as syntax constraints are honoured the file source may be replaced with the output of the
shell command set in netrc-pipe, to load an encrypted file, for example. The cache can be
managed with the command netrc.
The file consists of space, tabulator or newline separated tokens. This parser implements a
superset of the original BSD syntax, but users should nonetheless be aware of portability
glitches, shall their .netrc be usable across multiple programs and platforms:
• BSD only supports double quotation marks, for example ‘password "pass with spaces"’.
• BSD (only?) supports escaping of single characters via a reverse solidus (a space could
be escaped via ‘\ ’), in- as well as outside of a quoted string. This method is assumed
to be present, and will actively be used to quote double quotation marks ‘"’ and reverse
solidus ‘\’ characters inside the login and password tokens, for example for display
purposes.
• BSD does not require a final quotation mark of the last user input token.
• The original BSD (Berknet) parser also supported a format which allowed tokens to be
separated with commas – whereas at least Hewlett-Packard still seems to support this
syntax, this parser does not!
• As a non-portable extension some widely-used programs support shell-style comments: if
an input line starts, after any amount of whitespace, with a number sign ‘#’, then the
rest of the line is ignored.
• Whereas other programs may require that the .netrc file is accessible by only the user
if it contains a password token for any other login than “anonymous”, this parser will
always require these strict permissions.
Of the following list of supported tokens this parser uses (and caches) machine, login and
password. An existing default entry will not be used.
machine name
The hostname of the entries' machine, lowercase-normalized before use. Any
further file content, until either end-of-file or the occurrence of another
machine or a default first-class token is bound (only related) to the machine
name.
As an extension that should not be the cause of any worries this parser supports a
single wildcard prefix for name:
machine *.example.com login USER password PASS
machine pop3.example.com login USER password PASS
machine smtp.example.com login USER password PASS
which would match ‘xy.example.com’ as well as ‘pop3.example.com’, but neither
‘example.com’ nor ‘local.smtp.example.com’. In the example neither
‘pop3.example.com’ nor ‘smtp.example.com’ will be matched by the wildcard, since
the exact matches take precedence (it is however faster to specify it the other
way around).
default This is the same as machine except that it is a fallback entry that is used shall
none of the specified machines match; only one default token may be specified, and
it must be the last first-class token.
login name
The user name on the remote machine.
password string
The user's password on the remote machine.
account string
Supply an additional account password. This is merely for FTP purposes.
macdef name
Define a macro. A macro is defined with the specified name; it is formed from all
lines beginning with the next line and continuing until a blank line is
(consecutive newline characters are) encountered. (Note that macdef entries
cannot be utilized by multiple machines, too, but must be defined following the
machine they are intended to be used with.) If a macro named init exists, it is
automatically run as the last step of the login process. This is merely for FTP
purposes.
EXAMPLES
An example configuration
# This example assumes v15.0 compatibility mode
set v15-compat
# Request strict TLL transport layer security checks
set tls-verify=strict
# Where are the up-to-date TLS certificates?
# (Since we manage up-to-date ones explicitly, do not use any,
# possibly outdated, default certificates shipped with OpenSSL)
#set tls-ca-dir=/etc/ssl/certs
set tls-ca-file=/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt
set tls-ca-no-defaults
#set tls-ca-flags=partial-chain
wysh set smime-ca-file="${tls-ca-file}" \
smime-ca-no-defaults #smime-ca-flags="${tls-ca-flags}"
# This could be outsourced to a central configuration file via
# tls-config-file plus tls-config-module if the used library allows.
# CipherString: explicitly define the list of ciphers, which may
# improve security, especially with protocols older than TLS v1.2.
# See ciphers(1). Possibly best to only use tls-config-pairs-HOST
# (or -USER@HOST), as necessary, again..
# Note that TLSv1.3 uses Ciphersuites= instead, which will join
# with CipherString (if protocols older than v1.3 are allowed)
# Curves: especially with TLSv1.3 curves selection may be desired.
# MinProtocol,MaxProtocol: do not use protocols older than TLS v1.2.
# Change this only when the remote server does not support it:
# maybe use chain support via tls-config-pairs-HOST / -USER@HOST
# to define such explicit exceptions, then, e.g.,
# MinProtocol=TLSv1.1
if "$tls-features" =% ,+ctx-set-maxmin-proto,
wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
MinProtocol=TLSv1.1'
else
wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
Protocol=-ALL\,+TLSv1.1 \, +TLSv1.2\, +TLSv1.3'
endif
# Essential setting: select allowed character sets
set sendcharsets=utf-8,iso-8859-1
# A very kind option: when replying to a message, first try to
# use the same encoding that the original poster used herself!
set reply-in-same-charset
# When replying, do not merge From: and To: of the original message
# into To:. Instead old From: -> new To:, old To: -> merge Cc:.
set recipients-in-cc
# When sending messages, wait until the Mail-Transfer-Agent finishs.
# Only like this you will be able to see errors reported through the
# exit status of the MTA (including the built-in SMTP one)!
set sendwait
# Only use built-in MIME types, no mime.types(5) files
set mimetypes-load-control
# Default directory where we act in (relative to $HOME)
set folder=mail
# A leading "+" (often) means: under *folder*
# *record* is used to save copies of sent messages
set MBOX=+mbox.mbox DEAD=+dead.txt \
record=+sent.mbox record-files record-resent
# Make "file mymbox" and "file myrec" go to..
shortcut mymbox %:+mbox.mbox myrec +sent.mbox
# Not really optional, e.g., for S/MIME
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
# It may be necessary to set hostname and/or smtp-hostname
# if the "SERVER" of mta and "domain" of from do not match.
# The `urlencode' command can be used to encode USER and PASS
set mta=(smtps?|submissions?)://[USER[:PASS]@]SERVER[:PORT] \
smtp-auth=login/plain... \
smtp-use-starttls
# Never refuse to start into interactive mode, and more
set emptystart \
colour-pager crt= \
followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes fullnames \
history-file=+.s-nailhist history-size=-1 history-gabby \
mime-counter-evidence=0b1111 \
prompt='?\$?!\$!/\$^ERRNAME[\$account#\$mailbox-display]? ' \
reply-to-honour=ask-yes \
umask=
# Only include the selected header fields when typing messages
headerpick type retain from_ date from to cc subject \
message-id mail-followup-to reply-to
# ...when forwarding messages
headerpick forward retain subject date from to cc
# ...when saving message, etc.
#headerpick save ignore ^Original-.*$ ^X-.*$
# Some mailing lists
mlist '@xyz-editor\.xyz$' '@xyzf\.xyz$'
mlsubscribe '^xfans@xfans\.xyz$'
# Handle a few file extensions (to store MBOX databases)
filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
# A real life example of a very huge free mail provider
# Instead of directly placing content inside `account',
# we `define' a macro: like that we can switch "accounts"
# from within *on-compose-splice*, for example!
define XooglX {
set folder=~/spool/XooglX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@examp.ple>'
set pop3-no-apop-pop.gmXil.com
shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.gmXil.com
shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.gmXil.com
# Or, entirely IMAP based setup
#set folder=imaps://imap.gmail.com record="+[Gmail]/Sent Mail" \
# imap-cache=~/spool/cache
set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@smtp.gmXil.com smtp-use-starttls
# Alternatively:
set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.gmail.com:465
}
account XooglX {
\call XooglX
}
# Here is a pretty large one which does not allow sending mails
# if there is a domain name mismatch on the SMTP protocol level,
# which would bite us if the value of from does not match, e.g.,
# for people who have a sXXXXeforge project and want to speak
# with the mailing list under their project account (in from),
# still sending the message through their normal mail provider
define XandeX {
set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.yaXXex.com
shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.yaXXex.com
set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.yaXXex.com:465 \
hostname=yaXXex.com smtp-hostname=
}
account XandeX {
\call Xandex
}
# Create some new commands so that, e.g., `ls /tmp' will..
commandalias lls '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlrS'
commandalias llS '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlS'
set pipe-message/external-body='?* echo $MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL'
# We do not support gpg(1) directly yet. But simple --clearsign'd
# message parts can be dealt with as follows:
define V {
localopts yes
wysh set pipe-text/plain=$'?*#++=?\
< "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" awk \
-v TMPFILE="${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" \'\
BEGIN{done=0}\
/^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNED MESSAGE-----/,/^$/ {\
if(done++ != 0)\
next;\
print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
system("gpg --verify " TMPFILE " 2>&1");\
print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
print "";\
next;\
}\
/^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----/,\
/^-----END PGP SIGNATURE-----/{\
next;\
}\
{print}\
\''
print
}
commandalias V '\'call V
When storing passwords in ~/.mailrc appropriate permissions should be set on this file with
‘$ chmod 0600 ~/.mailrc’. If the [Option]al netrc-lookup is available user credentials can
be stored in the central ~/.netrc file instead; e.g., here is a different version of the
example account that sets up SMTP and POP3:
define XandeX {
set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
set netrc-lookup
# Load an encrypted ~/.netrc by uncommenting the next line
#set netrc-pipe='gpg -qd ~/.netrc.pgp'
set mta=smtps://smtp.yXXXXx.ru:465 \
smtp-hostname= hostname=yXXXXx.com
set pop3-keepalive=240 pop3-no-apop-pop.yXXXXx.ru
commandalias xp fi pop3s://pop.yXXXXx.ru
}
account XandeX {
\call XandeX
}
and, in the ~/.netrc file:
machine *.yXXXXx.ru login USER password PASS
This configuration should now work just fine:
$ echo text | s-nail -dvv -AXandeX -s Subject user@exam.ple
S/MIME step by step
[Option] The first thing that is needed for Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME is a
personal certificate, and a private key. The certificate contains public information, in
particular a name and email address(es), and the public key that can be used by others to
encrypt messages for the certificate holder (the owner of the private key), and to verify
signed messages generated with that certificate('s private key). Whereas the certificate is
included in each signed message, the private key must be kept secret. It is used to decrypt
messages that were previously encrypted with the public key, and to sign messages.
For personal use it is recommended to get a S/MIME certificate from one of the major CAs on
the Internet. Many CAs offer such certificates for free. Usually offered is a combined
certificate and private key in PKCS#12 format which S-nail does not accept directly. To
convert it to PEM format, the following shell command can be used; please read on for how to
use these PEM files.
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out certpem.pem -clcerts -nodes
$ # Alternatively
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out cert.pem -clcerts -nokeys
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out key.pem -nocerts -nodes
There is also https://www.CAcert.org which issues client and server certificates to members
of their community for free; their root certificate (https://www.cacert.org/certs/root.crt)
is often not in the default set of trusted CA root certificates, though, which means their
root certificate has to be downloaded separately, and needs to be part of the S/MIME
certificate validation chain by including it in smime-ca-dir or as a vivid member of the
smime-ca-file. But let us take a step-by-step tour on how to setup S/MIME with a
certificate from CAcert.org despite this situation!
First of all you will have to become a member of the CAcert.org community, simply by
registrating yourself via the web interface. Once you are, create and verify all email
addresses you want to be able to create signed and encrypted messages for/with using the
corresponding entries of the web interface. Now ready to create S/MIME certificates, so let
us create a new “client certificate”, ensure to include all email addresses that should be
covered by the certificate in the following web form, and also to use your name as the
“common name”.
Create a private key and a certificate request on your local computer (please see the manual
pages of the used commands for more in-depth knowledge on what the used arguments etc. do):
$ openssl req -nodes -newkey rsa:4096 -keyout key.pem -out creq.pem
Afterwards copy-and-paste the content of “creq.pem” into the certificate-request (CSR) field
of the web form on the CAcert.org website (you may need to unfold some “advanced options” to
see the corresponding text field). This last step will ensure that your private key (which
never left your box) and the certificate belong together (through the public key that will
find its way into the certificate via the certificate-request). You are now ready and can
create your CAcert certified certificate. Download and store or copy-and-paste it as
“pub.crt”.
Yay. In order to use your new S/MIME setup a combined private key/public key (certificate)
file has to be created:
$ cat key.pem pub.crt > ME@HERE.com.paired
This is the file S-nail will work with. If you have created your private key with a
passphrase then S-nail will ask you for it whenever a message is signed or decrypted, unless
this operation has been automated as described in Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME.
Set the following variables to henceforth use S/MIME (setting smime-ca-file is of interest
for verification only):
? set smime-ca-file=ALL-TRUSTED-ROOT-CERTS-HERE \
smime-sign-cert=ME@HERE.com.paired \
smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
smime-sign from=myname@my.host
Using CRLs with S/MIME or TLS
[Option] Certification authorities (CAs) issue certificate revocation lists (CRLs) on a
regular basis. These lists contain the serial numbers of certificates that have been
declared invalid after they have been issued. Such usually happens because the private key
for the certificate has been compromised, because the owner of the certificate has left the
organization that is mentioned in the certificate, etc. To seriously use S/MIME or TLS
verification, an up-to-date CRL is required for each trusted CA. There is otherwise no
method to distinguish between valid and invalidated certificates. S-nail currently offers
no mechanism to fetch CRLs, nor to access them on the Internet, so they have to be retrieved
by some external mechanism.
S-nail accepts CRLs in PEM format only; CRLs in DER format must be converted, like, e.g.:
$ openssl crl -inform DER -in crl.der -out crl.pem
To tell S-nail about the CRLs, a directory that contains all CRL files (and no other files)
must be created. The smime-crl-dir or tls-crl-dir variables, respectively, must then be set
to point to that directory. After that, S-nail requires a CRL to be present for each CA
that is used to verify a certificate.
FAQ
In general it is a good idea to turn on debug (-d) and / or verbose (-v, twice) if something
does not work well. Very often a diagnostic message can be produced that leads to the
problems' solution.
S-nail shortly hangs on startup
This can have two reasons, one is the necessity to wait for a file lock and cannot be
helped, the other being that S-nail calls the function uname(2) in order to query the
nodename of the box (sometimes the real one is needed instead of the one represented by the
internal variable hostname). One may have varying success by ensuring that the real
hostname and ‘localhost’ have entries in /etc/hosts, or, more generally, that the name
service is properly setup – and does hostname(1) return the expected value? Does this local
hostname have a domain suffix? RFC 6762 standardized the link-local top-level domain
‘.local’, try again after adding an (additional) entry with this extension.
I cannot login to Google mail (via OAuth)
Since 2014 some free service providers classify programs as “less secure” unless they use a
special authentication method (OAuth 2.0) which was not standardized for non-HTTP protocol
authentication token query until August 2015 (RFC 7628).
Different to Kerberos / GSSAPI, which is developed since the mid of the 1980s, where a user
can easily create a local authentication ticket for her- and himself with the locally
installed kinit(1) program, that protocol has no such local part but instead requires a
world-wide-web query to create or fetch a token; since there is no local cache this query
would have to be performed whenever S-nail is invoked (in interactive sessions situation may
differ).
S-nail does not directly support OAuth. It, however, supports XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER, see
But, how about XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER? If that is not used it is necessary to declare S-nail
a “less secure app” (on the providers account web page) in order to read and send mail.
However, it also seems possible to take the following steps instead:
1. give the provider the number of a mobile phone,
2. enable “2-Step Verification”,
3. create an application specific password (16 characters), and
4. use that special password instead of the real Google account password in S-nail (for
more on that see the section On URL syntax and credential lookup).
But, how about XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?
Following up I cannot login to Google mail (via OAuth) one OAuth-based authentication method
is available: the OAuth 2.0 bearer token usage as standardized in RFC 6750 (according SASL
mechanism in RFC 7628), also known as XOAUTH2 and OAUTHBEARER, allows fetching a temporary
access token via the web that can locally be used as a password. The protocol is simple and
extendable, token updates or even password changes via a simple TLS secured server login
would be possible in theory, but today a web browser and an external support tool are
prerequisites for using this authentication method. The token times out and must be
periodically refreshed via the web.
Some hurdles must be taken before being able to use this method. Using GMail as an example,
an application (that is a name) must be registered, for which credentials, a “client ID” and
a “client secret”, need to be created and saved locally (in a secure way). These initial
configuration steps can be performed at
https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials. Thereafter a refresh token can be
requested; a python program to do this for GMail accounts is https://github.com/google/
gmail-oauth2-tools/raw/master/python/oauth2.py:
$ python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
--client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
--generate_oauth2_token
To authorize token, visit this url and follow the directions:
https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/auth?client_id=...
Enter verification code: ...
Refresh Token: ...
Access Token: ...
Access Token Expiration Seconds: 3600
$ # Of which the last three are actual token responses.
$ # Thereafter access tokens can regularly be refreshed
$ # via the created refresh token (read on)
The generated refresh token must also be saved locally (securely). The procedure as a whole
can be read at https://github.com/google/gmail-oauth2-tools/wiki/OAuth2DotPyRunThrough.
Since periodic timers are not yet supported, keeping an access token up-to-date (from within
S-nail) can only be performed via the hook on-main-loop-tick, or (for sending only)
on-compose-enter (for more on authentication please see the section On URL syntax and
credential lookup):
set on-main-loop-tick=o-m-l-t on-compose-enter=o-c-e
define o-m-l-t {
xcall update_access_token
}
define o-c-e {
xcall update_access_token
}
set access_token_=0
define update_access_token {
local set i epoch_sec epoch_nsec
vput vexpr i epoch
eval set $i # set epoch_sec/_nsec of vexpr epoch
vput vexpr i + $access_token_ 2100
if $epoch_sec -ge $i
vput ! password python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
--client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
--refresh-token=THE-REFRESH-TOKEN |\
sed '1b PASS;d; :PASS s/^.\{1,\}:\(.\{1,\}\)$/\1/'
vput csop password trim "$password"
if -n "$verbose"
echo password is <$password>
endif
set access_token_=$epoch_sec
endif
}
Not "defunctional", but the editor key does not work
Two thinkable situations: the first is a shadowed sequence; setting debug, or the most
possible verbose mode, causes a printout of the bind tree after that is built; being a
cache, this happens only upon startup or after modifying bindings.
Or second, terminal libraries (see On terminal control and line editor, bind, termcap) may
report different codes than the terminal really sends, rendering bindings dysfunctional
because expected and received data do not match; the verbose listing of bindings will show
the byte sequences that are expected. (One common source of problems is that the — possibly
even non-existing — keypad is not turned on, and the resulting layout reports the keypad
control codes for the normal keyboard keys.)
To overcome the situation use for example the program cat(1) with its option -v, if
available, to see the byte sequences which are actually produced by keypresses, and use the
variable termcap to make S-nail aware of them. The terminal this is typed on produces some
unexpected sequences, here for an example the shifted home key:
? set verbose
? bind*
# 1B 5B=[ 31=1 3B=; 32=2 48=H
bind base :kHOM z0
? x
$ cat -v
^[[H
$ s-nail -v -Stermcap='kHOM=\E[H'
? bind*
# 1B 5B=[ 48=H
bind base :kHOM z0
Can S-nail git-send-email?
Yes. Put (at least parts of) the following in your ~/.gitconfig:
[sendemail]
smtpserver = /usr/bin/s-nail
smtpserveroption = -t
#smtpserveroption = -Sexpandaddr
smtpserveroption = -Athe-account-you-need
##
suppresscc = all
suppressfrom = false
assume8bitEncoding = UTF-8
#to = /tmp/OUT
confirm = always
chainreplyto = true
multiedit = false
thread = true
quiet = true
annotate = true
Newer git(1) versions (v2.33.0) added the option sendmailCmd. Patches can also be send
directly, for example:
$ git format-patch -M --stdout HEAD^ |
s-nail -A the-account-you-need -t RECEIVER
Howto handle stale dotlock files
folder sometimes fails to open MBOX mail databases because creation of dotlock files is
impossible due to existing but unowned lock files. S-nail does not offer an option to deal
with those files, because it is considered a site policy what counts as unowned, and what
not. The site policy is usually defined by administrator(s), and expressed in the
configuration of a locally installed MTA (for example Postfix ‘stale_lock_time=500s’).
Therefore the suggestion:
$ </dev/null s-nail -s 'MTA: be no frog, handle lock' $LOGNAME
By sending a mail to yourself the local MTA can use its normal queue mechanism to try the
delivery multiple times, finally decide a lock file has become stale, and remove it.
IMAP CLIENT
[Option]ally there is IMAP client support available. This part of the program is obsolete
and will vanish in v15 with the large MIME and I/O layer rewrite, because it uses old-style
blocking I/O and makes excessive use of signal based long code jumps. Support can hopefully
be readded later based on a new-style I/O, with SysV signal handling. In fact the IMAP
support had already been removed from the codebase, but was reinstantiated on user demand:
in effect the IMAP code is at the level of S-nail v14.8.16 (with imapcodec being the sole
exception), and should be treated with some care.
IMAP uses the ‘imap://’ and ‘imaps://’ protocol prefixes, and an IMAP-based folder may be
used. IMAP URLs (paths) undergo inspections and possible transformations before use (and
the command imapcodec can be used to manually apply them to any given argument). Hierarchy
delimiters are normalized, a step which is configurable via the imap-delim variable chain,
but defaults to the first seen delimiter otherwise. S-nail supports internationalised IMAP
names, and en- and decodes the names from and to the ttycharset as necessary and possible.
If a mailbox name is expanded (see Filename transformations) to an IMAP mailbox, all names
that begin with `+' then refer to IMAP mailboxes below the folder target box, while folder
names prefixed by `@' refer to folders below the hierarchy base, so the following will list
all folders below the current one when in an IMAP mailbox: ‘folders @’.
Note: some IMAP servers do not accept the creation of mailboxes in the hierarchy base, but
require that they are created as subfolders of `INBOX' – with such servers a folder name of
the form
imaps://mylogin@imap.myisp.example/INBOX.
should be used (the last character is the server's hierarchy delimiter). The following
IMAP-specific commands exist:
cache Only applicable to cached IMAP mailboxes; takes a message list and reads the
specified messages into the IMAP cache.
connect If operating in disconnected mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to online mode and
connect to the mail server while retaining the mailbox status. See the
description of the disconnected variable for more information.
disconnect
If operating in online mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to disconnected mode while
retaining the mailbox status. See the description of the disconnected variable
for more. A list of messages may optionally be given as argument; the respective
messages are then read into the cache before the connection is closed, thus ‘disco
*’ makes the entire mailbox available for disconnected use.
imap Sends command strings directly to the current IMAP server. S-nail operates always
in IMAP `selected state' on the current mailbox; commands that change this will
produce undesirable results and should be avoided. Useful IMAP commands are:
create Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument and creates
it.
getquotaroot (RFC 2087) Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument
and prints the quotas that apply to the mailbox. Not all
IMAP servers support this command.
namespace (RFC 2342) Takes no arguments and prints the Personal
Namespaces, the Other User's Namespaces and the Shared
Namespaces. Each namespace type is printed in parentheses;
if there are multiple namespaces of the same type, inner
parentheses separate them. For each namespace a prefix and a
hierarchy separator is listed. Not all IMAP servers support
this command.
imapcodec
Perform IMAP path transformations. Supports vput (see Command modifiers), and
manages the error number !. The first argument specifies the operation: e[ncode]
normalizes hierarchy delimiters (see imap-delim) and converts the strings from the
locale ttycharset to the internationalized variant used by IMAP, d[ecode] performs
the reverse operation. Encoding will honour the (global) value of imap-delim.
The following IMAP-specific internal variables exist:
disconnected
(Boolean) When an IMAP mailbox is selected and this variable is set, no connection
to the server is initiated. Instead, data is obtained from the local cache (see
imap-cache). Mailboxes that are not present in the cache and messages that have
not yet entirely been fetched from the server are not available; to fetch all
messages in a mailbox at once, the command `copy * /dev/null' can be used while
still in connected mode. Changes that are made to IMAP mailboxes in disconnected
mode are queued and committed later when a connection to that server is made.
This procedure is not completely reliable since it cannot be guaranteed that the
IMAP unique identifiers (UIDs) on the server still match the ones in the cache at
that time. Data is saved to DEAD when this problem occurs.
disconnected-USER@HOST
The specified account is handled as described for the disconnected variable above,
but other accounts are not affected.
imap-auth-USER@HOST, imap-auth
Sets the IMAP authentication method. Supported are the default ‘login’ (called
‘plain’ by some servers), [v15-compat] ‘oauthbearer’ (see FAQ entry But, how about
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?), [v15-compat] ‘external’ and ‘externanon’ (for TLS secured
connections which pass a client certificate via tls-config-pairs), as well as the
[Option]al ‘cram-md5’ and ‘gssapi’. All methods need a user and a password except
‘gssapi’ and ‘external’, which only need the former. ‘externanon’ solely builds
upon the credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go
since tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422, and fail if additional
credentials are actually passed.
imap-cache
Enables caching of IMAP mailboxes. The value of this variable must point to a
directory that is either existent or can be created by S-nail. All contents of
the cache can be deleted by S-nail at any time; it is not safe to make assumptions
about them.
imap-delim-USER@HOST, imap-delim-HOST, imap-delim
The hierarchy separator used by the IMAP server. Whenever an IMAP path is
specified it will undergo normalization. One of the normalization steps is the
squeezing and adjustment of hierarchy separators. If this variable is set, any
occurrence of any character of the given value that exists in the path will be
replaced by the first member of the value; an empty value will cause the default
to be used, it is ‘/.’. If not set, we will reuse the first hierarchy separator
character that is discovered in a user-given mailbox name.
imap-keepalive-USER@HOST, imap-keepalive-HOST, imap-keepalive
IMAP servers may close the connection after a period of inactivity; the standard
requires this to be at least 30 minutes, but practical experience may vary.
Setting this variable to a numeric `value' greater than 0 causes a `NOOP' command
to be sent each `value' seconds if no other operation is performed.
imap-list-depth
When retrieving the list of folders on an IMAP server, the folders command stops
after it has reached a certain depth to avoid possible infinite loops. The value
of this variable sets the maximum depth allowed. The default is 2. If the folder
separator on the current IMAP server is a slash `/', this variable has no effect
and the folders command does not descend to subfolders.
imap-use-starttls-USER@HOST, imap-use-starttls-HOST, imap-use-starttls
Causes S-nail to issue a `STARTTLS' command to make an unencrypted IMAP session
TLS encrypted. This functionality is not supported by all servers, and is not
used if the session is already encrypted by the IMAPS method.
SEE ALSO
bogofilter(1), gpg(1), more(1), newaliases(1), openssl(1), sendmail(1), sh(1),
spamassassin(1), iconv(3), setlocale(3), aliases(5), termcap(5), terminfo(5), locale(7),
mailaddr(7), re_format(7) (or regex(7)), mailwrapper(8), sendmail(8)
HISTORY
M. Douglas McIlroy writes in his article “A Research UNIX Reader: Annotated Excerpts from
the Programmer's Manual, 1971-1986” that a mail(1) command already appeared in First Edition
UNIX in 1971:
Electronic mail was there from the start. Never satisfied with its exact behavior,
everybody touched it at one time or another: to assure the safety of simultaneous
access, to improve privacy, to survive crashes, to exploit uucp, to screen out foreign
freeloaders, or whatever. Not until v7 did the interface change (Thompson). Later,
as mail became global in its reach, Dave Presotto took charge and brought order to
communications with a grab-bag of external networks (v8).
BSD Mail, in large parts compatible with UNIX mail, was written in 1978 by Kurt Shoens and
developed as part of the BSD UNIX distribution until 1995. This manual page is derived from
“The Mail Reference Manual” that Kurt Shoens wrote for Mail 1.3, included in 3BSD in 1980.
The common UNIX and BSD denominator became standardized as mailx(1) in the X/Open
Portability Guide Issue 2 (January 1987). After the rise of Open Source BSD variants Mail
saw continuous development in the individual code forks, noticeably by Christos Zoulas in
NetBSD. Based upon this Nail, later Heirloom Mailx, was developed by Gunnar Ritter in the
years 2000 until 2008. Since 2012 S-nail is maintained by Steffen Nurpmeso.
Electronic mail exchange in general is a concept even older. The earliest well documented
electronic mail system was part of the Compatible Time Sharing System (CTSS) at MIT, its
MAIL command had been proposed in a staff planning memo at the end of 1964 and was
implemented in mid-1965 when Tom Van Vleck and Noel Morris wrote the necessary code.
Similar communication programs were built for other timesharing systems. One of the most
ambitious and influential was Murray Turoff's EMISARI. Created in 1971 for the United
States Office of Emergency Preparedness, EMISARI combined private electronic messages with a
chat system, public postings, voting, and a user directory.
During the 1960s it was common to connect a large number of terminals to a single, central
computer. Connecting two computers together was relatively unusual. This began to change
with the development of the ARPANET, the ancestor of today's Internet. In 1971 Ray
Tomlinson adapted the SNDMSG program, originally developed for the University of California
at Berkeley timesharing system, to give it the ability to transmit a message across the
network into the mailbox of a user on a different computer. For the first time it was
necessary to specify the recipient's computer as well as an account name. Tomlinson decided
that the underused commercial at ‘@’ would work to separate the two.
Sending a message across the network was originally treated as a special instance of
transmitting a file, and so a MAIL command was included in RFC 385 on file transfer in 1972.
Because it was not always clear when or where a message had come from, RFC 561 in 1973 aimed
to formalize electronic mail headers, including “from”, “date”, and “subject”. In 1975 RFC
680 described fields to help with the transmission of messages to multiple users, including
“to”, “cc”, and “bcc”. In 1977 these features and others went from best practices to a
binding standard in RFC 733. Queen Elizabeth II of England became the first head of state
to send electronic mail on March 26 1976 while ceremonially opening a building in the
British Royal Signals and Radar Establishment (RSRE) in Malvern.
AUTHORS
Kurt Shoens, Edward Wang, Keith Bostic, Christos Zoulas, Gunnar Ritter. S-nail is developed
by Steffen Nurpmeso <s-mailx@lists.sdaoden.eu>.
CAVEATS
[v15 behaviour may differ] Interrupting an operation via SIGINT aka ‘control-C’ from
anywhere else but a command prompt is very problematic and likely to leave the program in an
undefined state: many library functions cannot deal with the siglongjmp(3) that this
software (still) performs; even though efforts have been taken to address this, no sooner
but in v15 it will have been worked out: interruptions have not been disabled in order to
allow forceful breakage of hanging network connections, for example (all this is unrelated
to ignore).
The SMTP and POP3 protocol support of S-nail is very basic. Also, if it fails to contact
its upstream SMTP server, it will not make further attempts to transfer the message at a
later time (setting save and sendwait may be useful). If this is a concern, it might be
better to set up a local SMTP server that is capable of message queuing.
BUGS
When a network-based mailbox is open, directly changing to another network-based mailbox of
a different protocol (i.e., from POP3 to IMAP or vice versa) will cause a “deadlock”.
After deleting some message of a POP3 mailbox the header summary falsely claims that there
are no messages to display, one needs to perform a scroll or dot movement to restore proper
state.
In ‘thread’ed sort mode a power user may encounter crashes very occasionally (this is may
and very).
Please report bugs to the contact-mail address, for example from within s-nail: ‘? eval mail
$contact-mail’. Including the verbose output of the command version may be helpful:
? wysh set escape=! verbose; vput version xy; unset verbose;\
eval mail $contact-mail
Bug subject
!I xy
!.
Information on the web at ‘$ s-nail -X 'echo $contact-web; x'’.